Home

LGB5124A User`s Manual

1. TE ited Y OOOOOOROOOO0O000 S 8 8 6 6 aaa eee Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding NOTE Disabling unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery e MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers to run the SSM service model for the groups in the address Using IPv6 Address range e Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side TT eo Port The Port index to enable or disable the MLD Snooping function eo Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 6 2 VLAN Configuration When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic
2. Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link NOTE NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link NOTE NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh the LLDP Neighbors information by manual 100 LGB5124A User Manual 3 8 6 Port Statistics Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack of switches while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Web Interface To show LLDP Statistics 1 Click LLDP than click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters 2 Click Refresh for manual update Web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update Web screen 4 Click Clear to clear all counters Figure 3 8 6 The LLDP Port Statistics information Global Counters Auto refresh Refresh Clear Neighbour entries were last changed at 2011 01 01 00 00 00 4945 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added 0 Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries
3. 3 16 4 Port Shaping This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shaping for all switch ports It describes detailed information for the ports that currently belong to the selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Shapers in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Shapers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Shapers Figure 3 18 4 The QoS Egress Port Shapers QoS Egress Port Shapers Port ao isabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Q2 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Q3 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled 136 Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Shapers Shapers Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Port disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled
4. Places Files of type fan Files x Parameter description eo Browse Click the Browse button to search the Configuration URL and filename Upload Click the Upload button and the switch will start to upload the configuration from the stored location PC or Server 230 LGB5124A User Manual 5 5 Diagmostics This section provides a set of basic system diagnosis It let users know that whether the system is healthy or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping ICMPv6 and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics 5 5 1 Ping This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify ICMP PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMP PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 1 The ICMP Ping ICMP Ping IP Address 0000 Ping Size 64 Parameter description e IP Address Set the IP Address of device that you want to ping e Ping Size Set the ICMP Packet size to ping the other device o Start Click the Start button and the switch will start to ping the device using ICMP packet size you set on the switch Five ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING6 server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20
5. or Tag 147 VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any a user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values OAahwons Any Ethernet LLC SNAP IPv4 IPv6 NOTE All frame types are explained below 1 Any Allow all types of frames 2 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid Ethernet type can have values within 0x600 0xF FFF or Any default value is Any 3 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any 4 SNAP PID Valid PID a k a Ethernet type can have value within 0x00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any S
6. Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 2 6 7 Trap The function is used to configure SNMP trap To create a new trap account click on the lt No number gt button and enter the trap information then click on lt Apply gt Max Group Number 6 Web Interface To configure SNMP Trap setting 1 Click SNMP Trap 2 Display the SNMP Trap Hosts information table 3 Choose a entry to display and modify the detail parameters or click on the delete button to delete the trap hosts entry Figure 2 6 7 The SNMP Trap Host Configuration Trap Hosts Configuration Delete No Version Server UDP Community Security Severity Security Authentication Privacy IP Port Name Level Level Protocol Protocol 26 LGB5124A User Manual Trap Host Configuration Trap Version v2c Server IP 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 162 Community Security Name Severity Level Info v Security Level Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Sa
7. Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch stack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down Without aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end hos
8. VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Combined Auto reffesh Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page lt lt Port Members VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10a 98 108 1 AAAA A A O Parameter description VLAN USER You can scroll to select one kind of VLAN user as below VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple 109 spanning trees in a network which s
9. 10B No NOOR Wr Parameter description o Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if another port leaves Meanwhile its LACP status is disabled Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e AggrID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs eo Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port e Auto refresh Set the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click this icon to refresh the LACP port status information manually 50 LGB5124A User Manual 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics This section describes how to set LACP function on the switch to provide a Port Statistics overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information click on the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 3 3 2 4 The LACP Statistics LACP LACP Discarded Port Received Transmitted Unknown Illegal ooooocooocooc
10. 192 208 224 240 Priority has the same definition as in the RSTP specification But in MSTP this parameter can be respectively applied to ports of CIST and ports of any MSTI Admin Edge Scroll this parameter to select Edge Non Edge If user selects Edge this port will be an edge port An Edge Port is a port connected to a device that knows nothing about STP or RSTP Usually the connected device is an end station Edge Ports will immediately transit to forwarding state and skip the listening and learning state because the edge ports cannot create bridging loops in the network This will expedite the convergence When the link on the edge port toggles the STP topology remains unchanged Unlike the designated port or root port though an edge port will transit to a normal spanning tree port immediately if it receives a BPDU Default Edge Admin P2P Scroll this parameter to select Auto Force True Force False We say a port is a point to point link from RSTP s view if it is in full duplex mode but is a shared link if it is in half duplex mode RSTP fast convergence can only happen on point to point links and on edge ports This can expedite the convergence because this will fast transition the port to forwarding state There are three parameters Auto Force True and Force False used to configure the type of the point to point link If configure this parameter to be Auto it means RSTP will use the duplex mo
11. 2 If you want to auto refresh the information click on the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status 4 Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status Figure 3 5 4 The IGMP Snooping Status VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries V Reports V2Reports V3Reports V2Leaves ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Received 1 Y v3 ACTIVE 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 E 6 ih 8 9A 0A 9B 0B Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version The currently working Host Version e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries e Queries Received The number of Received Queries e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports 13 V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Click on these icons to refresh the Status or clear manually 3 5 5 Group Information After you set the IGMP Snooping function then you can display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on t
12. Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 31 3 1 3 Traffic Overview The section describes the Port statistics information and provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Traffic Overview 2 To auto refresh check the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 3 The Port Statisitcs Overview Port Statistics Overview parece Port Packets Bytes Errors Drops Filtered Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received ul 7619 10650 1514026 3332717 0 0 0 0 29 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ahi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Oo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port o Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port eo Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port Oo Drops The numbe
13. DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Port 1 Auto refresh L Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover 0 Tx Discover 0 Rx Offer 0 Tx Offer 0 Rx Request 0 Tx Request 0 Rx Decline 0 Tx Decline 0 Rx ACK 0 Tx ACK 0 Rx NAK 0 Tx NAK 0 Rx Release 0 Tx Release 0 Rx Inform 0 Tx Inform 0 Rx Lease Query 0 Tx Lease Query 0 Rx Lease Unassigned 0 Tx Lease Unassigned 0 Rx Lease Unknown 0 Tx Lease Unknown 0 Rx Lease Active 0 Tx Lease Active 0 Parameter description Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets
14. Device name The name of the switch user defined System Date Shows the system time of the switch The format is day of week month day hours minutes seconds year System up time The time accumulated since this switch is powered up The format is day hour minute second BIOS version The version of the BIOS in this switch Firmware version The firmware version in this switch Firmware Hardware version The version of hardware and mechanical The figure before the hyphen is the version of electronic firmware the figure after the hyphen is the version of hardware Serial number The serial number is assigned by Black Box Host IP address The IP address of the switch Host MAC address The Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch Device Port Shows all types and numbers of ports in the switch RAM size The size of the RAM in this switch Flash size The size of the flash memory in this switch Bridge FDB size Displays the bridge FDB size information Transmit Queue Displays the device s transmit hardware priority queue information Maximum Frame size Displays the device s maximum frame size 5 2 1 2 Configuration You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch Web interface To configure System Information in the Web interface 1 Click System System Information Configuration 2 Write System Contact System Name
15. Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row eo Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port e Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Auto Speed selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner Disabled disables the switch port operation e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS e Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changin
16. Receive only Information exchange only and ANY Discovery State The field will display the current state of the discovery process The possible states include Fault state Active state Passive state SEND_LOCAL_REMOTE_STATE SEND_LOCAL_REMOTE_ OK_STATE SEND_ANY_STATE Remote MAC Address The field will show which device joins the OAM and its MAC address Mode The field will show the Mode in which the Link OAM is operating Active or Passive Unidirectional Operation Support The field will show the status of this configuration is retrieved from the PHY Users cannot configure this feature Remote Loopback Support If status is enabled DTE is capable of OAM remote loopback mode The field will show enabled 162 LGB5124A User Manual Link Monitoring Support If status is enabled DTE supports interpreting Link Events The field will show enabled MIB Retrieval Support If status is enabled DTE supports sending Variable Response OAMPDUs The field will show enabled MTU Size This represents the largest OAMPDU in octets supported by the DTE This value is compared to the remotes Maximum PDU Size and the smaller of the two is used Multiplexer State When in forwarding state the Device is forwarding non OAMPDUs to the lower sub layer In discarding state the device discards all the non OAMPDU s Parser State When in forwarding state the device forwards non OAMPDUs to a higher sub
17. System Location information in this page 3 Click Save Figure 2 1 2 System Information configuration System Information Configuration System Contact System Name GS1510 08 System Location Parameter description e System Contact The name job function of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 eo System Name The administrator assigns the name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character The first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 6 LGB5124A User Manual 2 2 Time This page configures the switch time Time configuration includes Time Configuration and NTP Configuration 2 2 1 Manual The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple just input Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second within the valid value range indicated in each
18. disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled LGB5124A User Manual Strict Priority If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure E guy kbps i 500 kbps f a pra aa Em xN a x xN 137 Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers e Shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Shapers Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 1 1000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 100 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This paramet
19. e Attribute Type Currently the only supported Attribute Type is VLAN e MRP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state machine behavior for MRP on a perticular port locally e normal participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will operate normally in MRP protocol exchanges e non participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant e Periodic Tx This configuration is used to configure transmission mode and this can be configured either as enabled or disable The default value of Periodic Tx is disable e Auto refresh Check the box next to auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this button to refresh the MRP Port configuration information manually e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 126 LGB5124A User Manual 3 14 2 Statistics This page provides MRP port statistics for all switch ports The port statistics relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display MRP Port statistics in the Web interface 1 Click MRP statistics 2 Scroll to the port you want to display the MRP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the MRP statistics information Figure 3 14 2 The MRP Port Statisti
20. icmp_seq 0 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 231 5 5 2 Ping6 This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMPv6 PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 2 The ICMPv6 Ping ICMPv6 Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Size 64 Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address with IPv6 e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes o Start Click the Start button and the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size that is set on the switch Five ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK
21. more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC 3 10 7 1 Protocol to Group This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected switch unit in the switch stack Web Interface To configure Protocol based VLAN configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Protocol based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and Group Name 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 7 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found 4 dd new entry E Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name Delete Ethemet gt Etype 00800 Parameter description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 116 LGB5124A User Manual 3 LLC SNAP Note On changing the F
22. port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports Web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This groups ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List Web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in the 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government that will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switch
23. 0 bad You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets 232 LGB5124A User Manual 5 5 3 VeriPHY This section is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table NOTE VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Web Interface To configure a VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify the Port you want to check 2 Click Start Figure 5 5 3 The VeriPHY VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Port All v Cable Status Port PairA LengthA PairB LengthB PairC LengthC PairD LengthD CMO ON OME UUN E Parameter description e Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair 233 ACE ACL AES APS A Glossary of Web based Management ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame type
24. 1 Parameter description Port State e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values o Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned o Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Port Counters e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X 203 e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Selected Counters Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the po
25. 11 pps 16 11 pps M Save Parameter description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row o Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or O 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 2 3 Access Control List The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule An Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packets to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence ca
26. 1970 01 01 02 20 04 1970 01 01 18 55 49 1970 01 01 19 58 11 1970 01 01 19 58 45 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 Parameter description e Auto refresh When you click on the auto refresh icon the device will refresh the log automatically O Level Information level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Time Displays the log record by device time The time of the system log entry Message Displays the log detail message The message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear Click to refresh the system log or clear them manually use the other icons for next up page or entry 17 2 5 3 Detailed Log This section describes that display the detailed log information of the switch Web Interface To display the detailed log configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Syslog Detailed Log 2 Display the log information Figure 2 5 3 The Detailed System Log Information Message Switch just made a cold boot Parameter description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear Click
27. A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected switch stack unit when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs Oo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 114 LGB5124A User Manual 3 10 6 2 Status This section shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Currently we support following VLAN User types NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configured in the Web interface 1 Click MAC based VLAN Status 2 Specify the Sta
28. Auto v 13 None Y Auto Y 12814 Edge Auto Y 14 None Auto Y 128 Edge Auto 15 None 4 Auto 128 e Edge w Auto v 16 None Auto v 128 Y Edge Auto v 17 None Auto 128 Y Edge v Auto E 18 None Auto v 128 v Edge Auto v 19 None Auto v 128 v Edge Auto v 20 None Auto 128 Edge vw Auto v 21 None Auto v 128 Y Edge vw Auto w 22 None Auto 128 v Edge w Auto v 23 None Auto 128 Edge Auto Y 24 None Auto v 128 e Edge Auto v 25 None Auto 128 vw Edge v Auto v 26 None Auto v 128 Edge v Auto v 27 None Auto v 128 w Edge w Auto v 28 None Auto 128 Y Edge vw Auto v 29 None Auto 128 9 Edge x Auto Y 65 LGB5124A User Manual Parameter description Port The physical port index available value is 1 to 24 Instance Every MRSTP instance must have a unique instance ID Path Cost Select Auto or Specific If you select Specific then you need to assign the path cost value The available range is from 1 to 200 000 000 The same definition as in the RSTP specification But in MRSTP this parameter can be respectively applied to ports of CIST and ports of any MSTI Priority The available value O 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176
29. Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 20 Trap Event Severity Use this function to set a Alarm trap and get the Event log The Trap Events Configuration function enables the switch to send out the trap information when pre defined trap events occur Web Interface To configure the Trap Event Severity Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 21 1 The Trap Event Severity Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration Group Name Severity Level ACL Info ACL Log Debug Access Mgmt Info Y Auth Failed Warning Cold Start Warning Config Info Info Firmware Upgrade Info v Import Export Info v LACP Info Vi Link Status Warning Login Info be Logout Info Mgmt IP Change Info v Module Change Notice NAS Info Passwd Change Info Port Security Info vi Thermal Protect Info v VLAN Info amp Warm Start Warning Parameter description e Group Name The field describes the Trap Event definition eo Severity Level Scroll to select the event type Emerg Alert Crit Error Warming Notice Info and Debug e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo
30. Configuration Configured Current DHCP Client O IP Address 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Router 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 1 1 DNS Server 0000 0 0 0 0 IP DNS Proxy Configuration DNS Proxy Parameter description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation e IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation e DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation e VLANID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network 14 LGB5124A User Manual 2 4 2 IPV6 This section describes how to configure the switch managed IPv6 information The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used t
31. DSCP Configuration Port Ingress Egress Translate Classify Rewrite ia lt gt v lt gt v 1 O Disable Disable Y 2 a Disable v Disable v 3 O Disable Disable v 4 B Disable Disable v 5 a Disable Disable v 6 a Disable Disable v 7 a Disable vw Disable v 8 a Disable Disable v 9A a Disable Disable v 10A a Disable Disable v 9B O Disable Disable y 10B a Disable Disable v Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values e Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification e DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 e Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP 140 LGB5124A User Manual e All Classify all DSCP e Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of these parameters e Disable No Egress rewrite e Enable Rewrite enable without remapped e Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value e Buttons Save Click to save chan
32. Edge Auto 6 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 7 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 8 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 9 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 10 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 11 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 12 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 13 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 14 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 15 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 16 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 17 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 18 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 19 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 20 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 21 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 22 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 23 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 24 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 25 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 26 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 27 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 28 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 29 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto Parameter description Port The physical port index available value is 1 to 24 Instance Every MRSTP instance must have a unique instance ID Status To display the port join MRSTP status Role If Yes causes the Port not to be selected as the Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the b
33. Manual NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI e Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US o State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district eo City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighbourhood Neighborhood block eo Street Street Example Poppelvej e Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N e Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW eo Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing eo Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming John e Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 e Building Building structure Example Low Library eo Apartment Unit Apartment suite Ex
34. Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames eo Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE 149 O Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class If a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level If a frame matches the QCE then the DP level will be set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column o Conflict Displays QCE status Resources required to add a QCE may not available In that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise itis always No NOTE Conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource required by the QCE and pressing the Refresh button e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically e Resolve Conflict Click to resolve the conflict issue e Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the QCL information manually 3 16 12 Storm Control The section explains how to configure the Storm control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a bro
35. Pot2 mM Disabled PS P P Disabled ort 1 ort 2 Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Y 0 Port 2 v 6 1 w Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled vw Disabled 0 v a T 1 Permit Disabled Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 o Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit o Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Copy Select which port frames are copied on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled 39 Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled NOTE The System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the
36. Refresh Figure 2 1 1 System Information System Information Auto refresh O Model Name XGS2910 24F System Description 24 port GbE L2 Switch with 10 GbE uplink Location Contact Device Name XGS2910 24F System Date 2011 01 01 00 06 01 _ System Uptime Od 00 06 01 BIOS Version v1 00 Firmware Version 1 00 AABZ 0 C0 Hardware Mechanical Version v101 v1 01 Series Number 5112U47000008 Host IP Address 192 168 20 22 Subnet Mask _ 255 255 255 0 _ Gateway IP Address 192 168 20 250 _Host MAC Address cc 5d 4e 77 04 b2 _ Console Baudrate 115200 _RAM Size 128MB Flash Size 16MB Bridge FDB Size 32768 MAC Addresses Transmit Queue 8 queues per port Maximum Frame Size 10056 Fan Speed Fan1 5376 rpm Fan2 5190 rpm Fan3 4854 rpm Powers AC Power On 12 5V DC Power Off 0 0V Temperature 1 33 C 91 F Temperature 2 26 C 78 F Temperature 3 33 C 91 F Temperature 4 34 C 93 F 4 LGB5124A User Manual Parameter description Model name The model name of this device System description 20 port 10 100 1000BASE T 4 Port TP 100 1G SFP Combo Gigabit Managed Switch Eco Location Where this switch is located User defined Contact Write down the contact person and phone here for help managing and maintaining the switch You can configure this parameter through the device s user interface or SNMP
37. Synchronization Status Message that contains a QL indication STP Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol that ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP Switch ID Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is shown on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the Web pages as well as in the CLI commands 244 LGB5124A User Manual SyncE SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet It is used to sychronize a network clock frequency Do not confuse this with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 T TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol that provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority Tag Priority is a 3 bit field that stores the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web
38. Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack not per switch The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 104 LGB5124A User Manual 3 9 2 Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address Web Interface To Display the MAC Address Table in the Web interface 1 Click Dynamic MAC Table 2 Specify the VLAN and MAC Address 3 Display the MAC Address Table Figure 3 9 2 The Dynamic MAC Address
39. Table information MAC Address Table Auto refresh C Refresh Clear Jl les J za Start from VLAN 1 and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members Type VLAN MAC Address cpPu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 k8 o9 10 11 12 Static 1 00 01 C1 00 00 00 v Dynamic 1 00 25 22 1C 70 F5 v Static 1 33 33 FF 00 02 01 y Static 1 33 33 FF AB C0 E2 y 2 Static 1 FF FF FF FF FFFAF Y vv Vv VV VV VV Vv Parameter description MAC Table Columns Switch stack only The stack unit where the entry is learned e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry eo VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Auto refresh Check the Auto fresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear lt lt gt gt Click on the Refresh icon to refresh the MAC address entries manually or press clear to clean up the MAC table Press lt lt or gt gt to go up or down pages of the table 105 3 10 VLAN Assign a specific VLAN for management The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMP and Telnet session By default the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using the Management VLAN window Only one mana
40. This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Org Discarded The number of organizationally received TLVs Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the LLDP Port Statistics information manually or to clear the entries 102 LGB5124A User Manual 3 9 Filtering Data Base Filtering Data Base Configuration gathers many functions that cannot be categorized to some function type including MAC Table Information and Static MAC Learning MAC table Frame switching is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds
41. To set the Rate limit value for this port the default is 500 e Unit Select the unit s rate from kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps e Flow Control Enable or disable flow control on port e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 133 3 16 3 Port Scheduler This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports and the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Schedulers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers Figure 3 16 3 The QoS Egress Port Schedules Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Schedulers er TEN E E KA 00 ies ite EARN E KI AU E ER OO fore 10 Vite EM O O E B G S E O E O AA 00 500 MXN PE 134 LGB5124A User Manual Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure Parameter description o Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e Weight Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port e Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this s
42. Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Receive Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters 7637 1518566 7183 29 425 0 4761 200 86 2588 oon Port 1 Auto refresh Refresh Clear Transmit Total Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Transmit Size Counters Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Transmit Queue Counters 10688 3337459 4974 5714 0 0 72 5380 2866 97 2139 Rx Q0 7637 TxQ0 0 Rx Q1 0 TxQ1 0 Rx Q2 0 TxQ2 0 Rx Q3 0 TxQ3 0 Rx Q4 0 TxQ4 0 Rx Q5 0 TxQ5 0 Rx 06 0 Tx0Q6 0 Rx Q7 0 TxQ7 10688 Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Port Statistics automatically Upper left scroll bar Receive Total and Transmit Total information To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with Port 0 Port 1 Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets 33 e Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast pack
43. VE NERO NY WON GS ESO e EE 0 11 0 15508 Ee Fe LEE ee E LE 00 Le ee 0 12 MA A A AE AMA 0 Parameter description Oo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Qn Qn is the Queue number QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Click on these buttons to refresh the Queuing Counters or clear them manually 35 3 1 6 SFP Information The section describes how a switch displays the SFP module detail information that you use to connect it to the switch The information includes Connector type Fiber type wavelength baud rate and Vendor OUI etc Web Interface To Display the SFP information in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then SFP Information 2 The switch displays the SFP Information Figure 3 1 6 The SFP Information Overview SFP Information for Port 11 Connector Type SFP LC Fiber Type Multi mode MM Tx Central Wavelength 850 Baud Rate 1000 Mbps Vendor OUI 00 40 c7 Vendor Name Ruby Tech Vendor PN SFP LC Vendor Rev 8403110262 Vendor SN 0000 Date Code 080409 Temperature none Vee none Mon1 Bias none Mon2 TX PWR none Mon3 RX PWR none Parameter description e Connector Type Display the connector type for instance UTP SC ST LC and so on
44. Web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Save Figure 4 2 2 The Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address Jrs new env L Add new entry save J Reset Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 185 4 2 3 Dynamic Table The section describes how to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address and entries per page 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 2 3 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table
45. a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag O is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading Os are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 o Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For troubleshooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL 199 Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions
46. a user defined value The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control the priority of ports having an identical port cost See above operEdge state flag Operational flag describes whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices no Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge states when a port is initialized AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDUs are received on the port or not 57 o Restricted Role If enabled this causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent b
47. addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 212 LGB5124A User Manual 1 Boot the stack or elect a new master switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch stack 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken o State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section NoTE That cli
48. any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 156 LGB5124A User Manual 3 21 SMTP Configuration Use this function to set a Alarm trap When the switch alarm goes off you can set the SMTP server to send you the alarm mail Web Interface To configure the SMTP Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration SMTP Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Severity Level 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 22 1 The SMTP Configuration SMTP Configuration Mail Server User Name Password Severity Level Info x Sender E Return Path Email Address 1 Email Address 2 Email Address 3 Email Address 4 Email Address 5 Email Address 6 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SMTP Configuration page Mail Server Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email Username Specify the username on the mail server Password Specify the password on the mail server Sender Set the mail sender name Return Path Set the mail return path as the sender mail address Email Address 1 6 Email address that would like to receive the alarm message Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 157 3 22 802 3ah OAM For Carr
49. be either Allow or Deny 83 3 7 MVR The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN In a multicast television application a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports 3 7 1 Configuration The section describes how to set the MVR basic Configuration and some parameters in the switch Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Configuration 2 Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 1 The MVR Configuration Disabled v Port Mode Type Immediate Leave 1 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled v 2 Disabled v Receiver Disabled 3 Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled v 4 Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled 5 Disabled v Receiver v Disabled Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled Disabled Receiver Y Disable
50. but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Oo Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only affects successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the NAS Configuration manually 200 LGB51
51. configuration IEEE 802 3ah OAM event configuration e Event Name Name of the Link Event configured on the switch It will be monitored by the switch Error Frame Event The Errored Frame Event counts the number of errored frames detected during the specified period The period is specified by a time interval Window in order of 100 msec This event is generated if the errored frame count is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period Period Threshold Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors detected at the Media Access Control sub layer Event Seconds Summary The Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event TLV counts the number of errored frame seconds that occurred during the specified period The period is specified by a time interval This event is generated if the number of errored frame seconds is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period An errored frame second is a one second interval wherein at least one frame error was detected Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sub layer Symbol Period Error Event The Errored Symbol Period Event counts the number of symbol errors that occurred during the specified period The period is specified by the number of symbols that can be received in a time interval on the underlying physical layer This event is generated if the symbol error count is equal to or greater than the specified
52. decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over The switch supports valid configurable daylight saving times between 5 and 5 steps for one hour If this parameter is zero the switch enacts daylight saving time You don t have to set the starting ending date as well If you set daylight saving to be non zero you have to set the starting ending date as well otherwise the daylight saving function will not be activated 7 LGB5124A User Manual Time Set Offset Provides the Daylight saving time set offset The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 1 to 1440 minutes default is 60 minutes Daylight Savings Type Provide the Daylight savings type selection You can select By Dates or Recurring for Daylight saving type From To configure Daylight saving start date and time use the format YYYY MM DD HH MM To To configure Daylight saving end date and time use the format YYYY MM DD HH MM Gi Note The from and to fields display the values you set 8 LGB5124A User Manual 2 2 2 NTP NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based on Greenwich Mean Time GMT If you use the NTP mode and select a built in NTP time server or manually specify an user defined NTP server as well as Time Zone the switch will sync the time in shortly after pressing lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically NTP d
53. default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol To maximize power saving the circuit isn t started when transmit data are ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be transmitted This does not introduce a large delay if data less then 3000 bytes shall be transmitted and data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired you can minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue has data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time Web Interface To configure the EEE Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then EEE 2 Choose the port that wants to enable the EEE function 3 EEE Urgent Queues level and the range from 1 to 8 The queue will postpone the transmsion until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted 4 Click the Save button to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to
54. destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts This will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page 3 Click on the Refresh button to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration ms Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier Compatibility RV Ql sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1sec URI sec 1 E z P 5 vi Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Up to 32 VLANs can be selected o MLD Querier A router sends MLD Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN 78 LGB5124A User Manual e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appr
55. device from each LAN that incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated Root X Designated X Root A a 1 Port q Designated por X j Bridge X ji T X Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology 3 4 1 Bridge Settings The section describes how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings used by all STP Bridge instances in the Swtich Stack Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Bridge Settings 2 Scoll to select the parameters and write down available val
56. direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Oo Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security gt AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled 195 RADIUS assigned QoS centrally controls the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines wheth
57. display the Port Status in this page It provides Link OAM configuration operational status The displayed field shows the active configuration status for the selected port Web Interface To display the Port Status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Port status 2 Scroll to select which port you want to monitor the Link OAM Status 3 Evoke auto refresh to update the detailed Link OAM Status data 4 Click the Refresh button to update the Port Status Figure 3 22 3 The Link OAM Port status Detailed Link OAM Status for Port 1 Port 1 Y Auto refresh Ol Refresh PDU Permission Receive only Discovery State Fault state Remote MAC Address o Local Remote Mode Passive Mode pp _Unidirectional Operation Support Disabled Unidirectional Operation Support Remote Loopback Support Disabled Remote Loopback Support Link Monitoring Support Enabled Link Monitoring Support gt MIB Retrieval Support Disabled MIB Retrieval Support MTU Size 1500 MTU Size Multiplexer State Forwarding Multiplexer State Parser State Forwarding Parser State Organizational Unique Organizational Unique Identification een Identification sa PDU Revision 0 PDU Revision Parameter description PDU Permission This field is available only for the Local DTE It displays the current permission rules set for the local DTE Possible values are Link fault
58. failing links or fault conditions e OAM Mode Scroll to select OAM mode You can configure the OAM Mode as Active or Passive The default mode is Passive Passive DTEs configured in Passive mode do not initiate the Discovery process Passive DTEs react to the initiation of the Discovery process by the remote DTE This eliminates the possibility of passive to passive links Passive DTEs will not send Variable Request or Loopback Control OAMPDUs Active DTEs configured in Active mode initiate the exchange of Information OAMPDUs as defined by the Discovery process Once the Discovery process completes active DTEs are permitted to send any OAMPDU while connected to a remote OAM peer entity in Active mode Active DTEs operate in a limited respect if the remote OAM entity is operating in Passive mode Active devices should not respond to OAM remote loopback commands and variable requests from a Passive peer Loopback support Enable the Loopback support You can use Link OAM remote loopback for fault localization and link performance testing Enabling the loopback support will allow the DTE to execute the remote loopback command that detects faults e Link Monitor support Controls whether the Link Monitor support is enabled for the switch When you enable Link Monitor support the DTE supports event notification including diagnostic information e MIB Retrieval Support Select which port you want to enable the MIB Retri
59. for Radius Server Default is 1812 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration of AAA in the Web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Accounting Port for Radius Server Default is 1813 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a TACACS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the Web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for TACACS Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for TACACS Server Default is 49 4 Specify the Secret with TACACS Server Figure 4 5 3 1 The Common Server Configuration Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration Timeout 15 seconds Dead Time 300 seconds Figure 4 5 3 2 The TACACS Accounting Configuration TACAC S Authorization and Accounting Configuration Authorization Disabled Fallback to Local Authorization Disabled v Accounting Disabled 206 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 4 5 3 3 The RADIUS Configuration Figure 4 5 3 4 The RADIUS Accounting Configuration Parameter description Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next ena
60. frame period errors _Symbol frame period error events 0 Symbol frame period error events 0 Local Event Seconds Summary Status Remote Event Seconds Summary Status Event Seconds Summary Time Stamp 0 Event Seconds Summary Time Stamp 0 Event Seconds Summary Window 0 Event Seconds Summary Window 0 Event Seconds Summary Threshold 0 Event Seconds Summary Threshold 0 Event Seconds Summary Events 0 Event Seconds Summary Events 0 Event Seconds Summary Error Total 0 Event Seconds Summary Error Total 0 Event Seconds Summary Event Total 0 Event Seconds Summary Event Total 0 Parameter description Port You can scroll to select which port you want to monitor detailed Link OAM events It shows the switch port number Frame Error Event Timestamp This two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in 100 ms intervals Frame Error Event Window This two octet field indicates the duration of the period in terms of 100 ms intervals 1 The default value is one second 2 The lower bound is one second 3 The upper bound is one minute Frame Error Event threshold This four octet field indicates the number of detected errored frames in the period required to be equal to or greater than for the event to be generated 1 The default value is one frame error 2 The lower bound is zero frame errors 3 The upper bound is unspecified Frame Errors The field shows this four octet field indicates the n
61. item Web Interface To configure Time in the Web interface 1 Click Time Manual 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Save Figure 2 2 1 The time configuration Time Configuration Clock Source Local Time Time Zone Offset Daylight Savings Time Set Offset Daylight Savings Use Local Settings Use NTP Server 2011 01 01 00 10 20 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS 0 min Enable min Range 1 1440 Default 60 By dates Type Recurring From YYYY MM DD HH MM To YYYY MM DD HH MM From Day Week Month Time HH MM To Day Week Month Time HH MM Parameter description o Clock Source Select the clock source for the LGB5124A You can choose Use local Settings or Use NTP Server for the LGB5124A time clock source e Local Time Shows the current time of the system e Time Zone Offset Provides the timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes e Daylight Saving Daylight saving is used in some countries If set it will adjust the time lag or advance in unit of hours according to the starting date and the ending date For example you can set the daylight saving to be 1 hour When the time passes over the starting time the system time will be increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over When the time passes over the ending time the system time will be
62. layer When in loopback the device is loops back non OAMPDUs to the lower sub layer When in discarding state the device discards non OAMPDUs Organizational Unique Identification 24 bit identifier unique to the vendor PDU Revision Thie indicates the current revision of the Information TLV The value of this field will start at zero and be incremented each time something in the Information TLV changes When the switch receives an Information TLV from a peer an OAM client may use this field to decide if it needs to be processed an Information TLV that is identical to the previous Information TLV doesn t need to be parsed because nothing in it has changed Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh information manually 163 3 22 4 Link Events This chapter explains how to inspect and change the current Link OAM Link Event configurations The Link OAM Link Event status relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The left pane displays the Event status for the Local OAM unit while the right pane displays the status for the Peer for the respective port Web Interface To display the Link Events in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Link Events 2 Scroll to select which port you want to monitor the Link Events 3 Check the box next to auto
63. logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment to build the bandwidth aggregation For example if there are three Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port then this logical port has bandwidth three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has 3 3 1 Static Trunk The Aggregation Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment to build the bandwidth aggregation 3 3 1 1 Static Trunk Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static GroupID to form a logical trunked port The benefit of using the Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should aggregate together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both ends of a link is strongly recommended NOTE Low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links 45 Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation Hash mode and Aggregation Group in the Web int
64. members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices 3 10 6 1 Configuration The MAC based VLAN entries can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Web Interface To configure MAC address based VLAN configuration in the Web interface 1 Click MAC address based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID 3 Click Save 113 Figure 3 10 6 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Currently no entries present bas new ont J MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete MAC Address VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10A 9B 108 Delete 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 Reset Parameter description e Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch in the stack e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members
65. of the target device So both parties must have the same community name Once completing the setting click on the lt Apply gt button and the setting takes effect Web Interface To display the SNMP System Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click SNMP System 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Specify the Engine ID 4 Click Apply Figure2 6 1 The SNMP System Configuration SNMP System Configuration SNMP State Enable Disable Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SNMP System Configuration page e SNMP State The term SNMP here is used to activate or de activate SNMP Enable Enable SNMP state operation Disable Disable SNMP state operation Default Enable e Engine ID SNMPv3 engine ID syntax 0 9 a f A F min 5 octet max 32 octet fifth octet can t input 00 Changing the Engine ID will clear all original users 19 2 6 2 Communities The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and User Name are unique To create a new community account please check lt Add new community gt button and enter the account information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 4 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Communities in the Web interface 1 Click SNMP Communities 2 Click Add new community 3 Specify the SNMP communities parameters 4 Click Save 5 If you want to modify or clear t
66. port shutdown operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled o Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh clear Click on these icons to refresh theACL Port Configuration or clear them by manual 3 2 2 Rate Limiters The section describes how to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 allows the user to set rate limiter value and units with pps or kbps Web Interface To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the Web interface 2 3 4 5 Click Configuration ACL then Rate Limiter Specify the Rate field and the range from 0 to 3276700 Scroll the Unit with pps or kbps Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 40 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 2 2 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate Unit 1 1f pps 2 1f pps 3 1f pps 4 1 pps 5 1 pps 6 1 Apps Y 7 1 Apps 8 1 pps 9 11H pps 10 11M pps 11 1 Apps 12 1 pps 13 1 pps 14 11 pps 15
67. protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server 238 LGB5124A User Manual IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an Internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of Webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather s
68. refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear Click on these buttons for refresh the Port Detail Statistics or clear them manually 34 LGB5124A User Manual 3 1 5 Qos Statistics The section describes how a switch displays the QoS detailed Queuing counters for a specific switch port and for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To Display the Queueing Counters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then QoS Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the Queueing Counters or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 5 The Queuing Counters Overview Queuing Counters Auto rebceh L Qo Qi Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 sor Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx A 07655 MN E Mo es FE TS PP 00 110501 105017 UES2 2 D 155008 IE LED AE Fe Le EP LEO G 0 3 10011555014 FE 105 PO Fs JE 65001 ON e FS 04 PE 0 5570 ESO 0 4 0 1555014 P05 Ps SO IO PO 0 ON O 004 AO 90 0 AO 0 5 D 1550018 PEO PES EG NO LEO ION OG 0 LO 0 6 0 E20 Es HY 0 ME 0 e RO 0 it A FAR A A A UA ET EL Oe e 0 8 o 051014 ESO PEGO LEO 10 OF 15004 FG 0 Se 0 9 oi eo LA FN cy LEO LES PESO LEO LEO SEO 0 10 00 MESA PEI oO
69. refresh to update the detailed Link Events data 4 Click the Refresh button to update the Link Events Figure 3 22 4 The detailed Link OAM Port status Detailed Link OAM Link Status for Port 1 Port 1 Y Auto refresh k Local Frame Error Status ia Remote Frame Error Status _Frame Error Event Timestamp 0 Frame Error Event Timestamp _0 Frame error event window _ 0 Frame error event window _ 0 Frame error event threshold 0 Frame error event threshold 0 Frame errors 0 Frame errors 0 Total frame errors 0 Total frame errors 0 Total frame error events 0 Total frame error events 0 E Local Frame Period Status ____ Remote Frame Period Status _Frame Period Error Event Timestamp __0 Frame Period Error Event Timestamp _ p Error E Window _ 0 Frame Period Error Event Window ll _Frame Error Event Threshold 0 Frame Period Error Event Threshold Il a Frame Period Errors 0 Frame Period Errors A y _Total frame period errors __0 Total frame period errors 0 Total frame period error events _ 0 Total frame period error events _ 0 Local Symbol Period Status Remote Symbol Period Status Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp 0 Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp 0 Symbol Period Error Event Window _ 0 Symbol Period Error Event Window _ 0 Symbol Period Error Event Threshold 0 Symbol Period Error Event Threshold 0 _ Symbol Period Errors __0 Symbol Period Errors 0 _Symbol frame period errors _ __0 Symbol
70. relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block intruders on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation DSCP Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes 236 LGB5124A User Manual EEE EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Etherne
71. revert to previously saved values 56 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 4 4 The STP CIST Port Configuration STP CIST Port Configuration Fp Cisr Aooreoatea Pon connowaton STP Sa E Restricted Point to Port Enabled Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge Role TCN BPDU Guard point Auto Ni 128 Edge v v Forced True F CIS Nomai Port Contgurato STP ci E Restricted Point to Port Enabled Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge Role TCN BPDU Guard aint 1 Auto 128 Edge v v Auto v 2 Auto v 128 Edge y v Auto v 3 Auto v 128 Edge v v Auto v 4 Auto v 128 Edge v v Auto v 5 Auto v 128 Edge v v Auto v 6 Auto v 128 Edge v v Auto v 7 Auto v 128 Edge v v Auto v 8 Auto bs 128 v Edge v v Auto v 9A Auto he 128 Edge Y v Auto v 10A Auto x 128 Edge de v Auto v 9B Auto 128 Edge y v Auto Y 108 Auto 128 Y Edge Y Y Auto v Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting you can enter
72. save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 10 The QoS Control List Configuration Action Class DPL oe QCE Port Frame Type SMAC DMAC VID Default vw CP Default v Parameter description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type 146 LGB5124A User Manual Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed The default value is Any o VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any o Conflict Displays QCE status Resources required to add a ACE may not available In
73. selected switch in the stack If none of the ports of this switch are members of a VLAN then the delete checkbox will be grayed out you cannot delete that entry e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Name Indicates the name of VLAN VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain at least one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries 106 LGB5124A User Manual o Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected switch stack unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other switch stack units but with no port members The check box is grayed out when VLAN is displayed on other stacked switches but users can add member ports to it A VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to prev
74. server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another This is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if he were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provide directory service and security features 245 UDP UDP is an acronym
75. set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify the Port you want to monitor 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 7 3 The Port Security Port Status Port Security Port Status Port 1 Port 1 Y Autoreftesh L Refresh MAC Address VLANID State Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Parameter description e MAC Address amp VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed o State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen th
76. such an address will receive the traffic sent to that address Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates to determine what multicast address to use NOTE This is a function of the application software not of MLD When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts MLD snooping enabled Listener MLD host o amp g Ose Source MOL MLD host 76 LGB5124A User Manual 3 6 1 Basic Configuration The section explains how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration and the parameters Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Enable or disable the Global configuration parameters Select the port to join Router port and Fast Leave 3 Scroll to select the Throttling mode with unlimited or 1 to 10 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 6 1 The MLD Snooping Basic Configuration Global Configuration O Port RouterPort FastLeave Throttling gt Y O 3 gt un a un 4 n
77. that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource required by the QCE and pressing the Refresh button e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class If a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level If a frame matches the QCE then the DP level will set to the value displayed under the DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then the DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under the DSCP column o Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Click Configuration QoS QoS Crontol List button Inserts a new QCE before the current row circle e button Edits the QCE up arrow button Moves the QCE up the list down arrow button Moves the QCE down the list x button Deletes the QCE button The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked eo Key Parameters Key configurations are described below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag
78. the access information then clcik on lt Save gt Max Group Number 14 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Access in the Web interface 1 Click SNMP Accesses 2 Click Add new Access 3 Specify the SNMP Access parameters 4 Click Save 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Figure 2 6 6 The SNMP Accesses Configuration Security Security Delete Group Name Model Level Read View Name Write View Name CO default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view x None x O any NoAuth NoPriv default_view default_view Y default_nw_group Add new access Delete Group Name Security Model Security Level Read ViewName Write View Name Add new access Save Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm vi Reserved for SNMPv1 25 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy
79. the port eo STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDUs received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDUs received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDUs received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDUs received and discarded on the port e Auto refresh Click the auto refresh box to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the STP Statistics information or clear manually 3 5 MRSTP The MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol is not standard Spanning tree protocol 62 LGB5124A User Manual It means the switch supports the MRSTP Several spanning trees exist at the same time and these spanning trees won t affect each other A switch supports MRSTP and accepts two or more RSTP in signal equipment These two RSTP group have different ports to join them and between different Hello Time Max Age Forwarding Delay The MRSTP configuration method was the same as RSTP but it needs to set for several times Otherwise each MRSTP could be set for differential parameters 3 5 1 Instance The section describes how to configure the switch to provide an MRSTP instance table that includes information Instance State Version Priority Hello time Max age and Forwarding delay of all MRSTP instances provisioned in the
80. these icons to refresh the RADIUS Statistics information by manual or to clear all entries 4 7 Port Security This section shows you how to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses 4 7 1 Limit Control This section shows you to to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Limit Control in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the System Configuration Mode 2 Check Aging Enabled 3 Set Aging Period Default is 3600 seconds To configure a Port Configuration of Limit Control in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration 2 Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration 3 Set Action Trap Shutdown Trap amp Shutdown 4 Click Save Figure 4 7 1 The Port Security Limit Control Configuration Disabled Port Mode Limit Disabled Af Prone isabled Y L 4 None isabled iv L 4 me isabled v 4 one isabled iv 411 None isabled Y isabled v isabled v isabled 4108 None isabled 4 e 9B lone w Cale 1 2 3 4 6 7 Doaa y 8 9A 0A 4 211 Parameter description System Configuration O Mode
81. threshold for that period 160 LGB5124A User Manual Frame Period Error Event The Errored Frame Period Event TLV counts the number of errored frames detected during the specified period The period is specified by a number of received frames This event is generated if the errored frame count is greater than or equal to the specified threshold for that period for example if the errored frame count is greater than or equal to 10 for the last 1 000 000 frames received Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sub layer Window 100 msec This parameter represents the window period of 100 msec available to observe various link events Period Threshold The parameter represents the threshold value for the window period for the appropriate Link event to notify the peer of this error RxPacket Threshold The parameter was using for represents the threshold value for the window period for the errors in the received packets to notify the peer of this error Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Click on these icons to refresh and clear information manually Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 161 3 22 3 Port Status When you configure the IEEE802 3ah OAM then the switch will
82. to its peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations that are based on a binary number called a key DHCP DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP is used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server 235 The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrat
83. to refresh the system log or clear them manually use the other icons for next up page or entry 18 LGB5124A User Manual 2 6 SNMP Any Network Management System NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent provided that the Management Information Base MIB is installed correctly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax The SNMP agent running on the switch responds to the request issued by SNMP manager Basically it is passive except for issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If you set the field SNMP to Enable the SNMP agent will start up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via SNMP manager If the field SNMP is set Disable the SNMP agent will be de activated and the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored 2 6 1 System This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch This function is used to configure SNMP settings community name trap host and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names then it can access the MIB information
84. to restart switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards Web Interface To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restart Device 2 Click Yes Figure 5 1 1 The Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Parameter description e Restart Device You can restart the switch stack on this page After restart the switch stack will boot normally e Buttons Yes Click Yes and the device will restart No Click to undo any restart action 223 5 2 Firmware This section describes how to upgrade Firmware The Switch can be enhanced with more value added functions by installing firmware upgrades 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the Web interface 1 Chick Browser to select firmware in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 2 1 The Firmware update Firmware Update Erose Upioaa Parameter description eo Browse Click the Browse button to search the Firmware URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button and the switch will start to upload the firmware from a stored PC or Server location Gi Note This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch stack Uploading software will update all managed switch
85. used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 2 4 1 IPV4 You can obtain the IPv4 address for the switch via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Configure the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Web Interface To configure an IP address in the Web interface 1 Click System IP Configuration 2 Specify the IPv4 settings and enable DNS proxy service if required 3 Click Save 13 Figure2 4 1 The IP configuration IP
86. uses the clients MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx XX XX XX XX XxX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower case hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maxim
87. 09 E Vee ke 03 E BA Pate LES oe RE fake EE ata EE eg SEE efor GEL Jo Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of all ports for which per port GARP statistics are shown Peer MAC Peer MAC is MAC address of the neighbor Switch from which a GARP frame is received e Failed Count explain Failed count here e Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh the GARP Port Statistics information manually 121 3 13 GVRP GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the VLAN group membership information The GVRP provides the VLAN registration service through a GARP application It uses GARP Information Declaration GID to maintain the ports associated with their attribute database and GARP Information Propagation GIP to communicate among switches and end stations With GID information and GIP GVRP state machine maintains the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and propagates this information to other GVRP aware devices to set up and update their knowledge database the set of VLANs associated with currently active members and the ports where these members can be reached 3 13 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports
88. 1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto o Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 eo QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds 70 LGB5124A User Manual e QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds the default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh
89. 24A User Manual 4 5 2 Switch Status The section describes each switch port s NAS status information The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Web Interface To configure a NAS Switch Status Configuration in the Web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 5 2 The Network Access Server Switch Status Network Access Server Switch Status Autosefesh O Admin State Port State Last Source LastID QoSClass Port VLAN ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled y y v o a Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled S 2 gt gt 100 N IG Io A Ido IR le Es lB oo n 0o00o00o00o00on000 iS co Parameter description e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values o Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states o Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently receive
90. 24A User Manual o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch stack o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 2 Radius Overview This section shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers status to ensure the function is workable Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Overview Configuration in the Web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 6 2 The RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Auto refresh L Refresh IP Address Status 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 2 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 3 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 5 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview IP Address Status 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 2 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 3 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 5 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled Parameter description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server o State The current state of the server This field has one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The serve
91. 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDUs a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDUs per second 53 Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 2 4 2 MSTI Map
92. 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Disable vw 3 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Disable vw 4 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN v normal participant Disable 5 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Disable vw 6 200 600 10000 MVRP v VLAN normal participant Disable vw Ti 200 600 10000 MVRP v VLAN normal participant Y Disable v 8 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Disable vw 9 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Disable vw 10 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Y Disable vw 11 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN v normal participant Disable 12 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN normal participant Disable Parameter description e Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure MRP settings There are two types of configuration settings that can be configured on per port bases e Timer Values e Application e Attribute Type e MRP Applicant e Periodic Tx Timer Values To set the MRP join timer leave timer and leave all timers the unit is Micro second Three different timers can be configured on this page Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200 ms Leave Timer The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000 ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600 ms Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000 ms 125 e Application Currently the only supported application is MVRP
93. 92 168 1 1 Figure 1 The login page Connect to 192 168 20 15 The server 192 168 20 15 at XG52910 24F requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name e admin v Fassword C Remember my password System Configuration This chapter describes all of the basic configuration tasks including the switch s system information and management for example Time Account IP Syslog and SNMP 2 1 System Information After you login the switch shows you the system information This is the default page It tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Contact Device Name System Up Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Serial Number Host IP Address Host Mac Address Device Port RAM Size and Flash Size If the switch malfunctions you will need to know the software version used MAC address serial number active ports and so on 2 1 1 Information The switch system information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the Web interface 1 Click SYSTEM System and Information 2 Specify the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and location of the switch Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate offset 3 Click
94. A E AA E nei ose 158 BADD de Port CONE AA A A A cates a AAA ES AA EA 158 3222 Eyen Confie it A A A A AAA A A hy 160 3222 3 RS A RR 162 IIA A a di 164 A A a is 167 IZIETRERNET DAM bi i A 169 A D O 171 327 ERP Sir td Ade AA daa Tao 173 A A O NS 175 S522 CONPIQUP ALON AAA AAA AAA ai 175 A A NN 178 SECURTO a PA AE cute vetebesceveetess cuasasesbesDocsccobuaventee 180 A RTP SOURCE GUARD cc 242 citer 2 don ee ae ek ee E ah Ae sea ea tati 180 ALU CONSUL AA Ie ea ase Ria ae PR E E EET Rs cede ATA 180 Be 1D STOIC A O 182 4 123 Dynamic Lab eck cisco kek A aces se as aE A a dasa aaa ts esta te SEG 183 4 2 ARP INSPROTION secs i lt ss02 208306 id 184 Ae DT CONSTA ON AA A A EEA cal A ae EG a dasa A AT 184 4 22 Statie Tables A AA A E A AE AAA AE A E ER 185 ADS DINAMICO LAD Ei A A TE R ES 186 4 3 DE CP SNOOPING 2 ies 187 GIL CONSUL AA A A E E A AS 187 BED SUSTO DRA AAA AE E A AI AAA AE AAA A E 188 4 4 DHCP RELAY oarre a E RR ARE E A a cicieds 190 424 A CONISUIALION 2 A A A E E A E EE 190 ES EIA E A A EEEE E E NT E E EE E EA E ENE EA E tes 192 Ae DS NAS nae Ee tis Neee A AA OLR Nn e ata 194 ASA CONPISUPALION A A AA a 194 ESSE ME A 201 E E IN O RT 203 46 ARA il A A A A rasa 206 42621 CONfISUPAUON srren a ea iR E A E ENEE Dees Rosle E A E 206 BIRD ta tie eb 209 II A DIAN EEEE A EA ET E AA AEE AA AE E EAE 210 AT PORT SECURITY v termer e a E redex este hin A A E S 211 P ET LAM it E0110 A ON 211 ASTED OS WUCA SAUS nainen a A AAA AA E LAS a L
95. ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons button Inserts a new ACE before the current row circle e button Edits the ACE row up arrow button Moves the ACE up the list down arrow button Moves the ACE down the list x button Deletes the ACE button The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings 43 o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear Remove All Click on these icons to refresh theACL configuration or clear them by manual Others remove all to clean up all ACL configurations on the table 3 2 4 ACL Status The section describes how to show the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It i
96. Aged Out 0 LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port TxFrames RxFrames RxErrors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ocoooo0o0o0o0o0oo oocoooo0ooooo ooooooooooo ooooooooooo coooooooooo ocoooo0oo0oo0o0oo oc0oooooooooo c0ooo0oooooooo 108 Parameter description Global Counters e Neighbor entries were last changed at Shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbors Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted eo Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port 101 Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table is full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded
97. D determines the packet s behavior at the egress side Oo Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether they exist or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules e Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh the VLAN Port Status information manually 3 10 5 Private VLANs In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN 3 10 5 1 Private VLANs Membership The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs Web Interface To configure Private VLAN configuration in the Web interfac
98. Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Auto refresh Refresh Ji I lt lt Ji gt gt Start from Port 1 Y VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address 9 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address No more entries Parameter description Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP Address User IP address of the entry e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click on these icons to refresh the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table manually or to go to the next up page or entry 186 LGB5124A User Manual 4 3 DHCP Snooping The section describes how to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network 4 3 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Snooping setting including Snooping Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Mode Configuration Trusted Untrusted Web Interface To configure DHCP Snooping in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the DHCP Snooping Configuration Mode 2 Select Trusted for the specific port in Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 3 1 The DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping M
99. EP This field assigns the East APS PDU handling MEP Port 1 APS MEP W APS MEP 173 The West APS PDU handling MEP Only one APS MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel and it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no west APS MEP is associated with this instance Ring Type To scroll to select the type of Protection ring It can be either major ring or sub ring Interconnected Node Interconnected Node indicates that the ring instance is interconnected Click on the checkbox to configure this Yes indicates it is an interconnected node for this instance No indicates that the configured instance is not interconnected Virtual Channel Sub rings can either have virtual channel or not on the interconnected node This is configured using the Virtual Channel checkbox Yes indicates it is a sub ring with virtual channel No indicates that a sub ring doesn t have virtual channel Major Ring ID Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub ring It is used to send topology change updates on major ring If ring is major this value is same as the protection group ID of this ring Alarm There is an active alarm on the ERPS When you complete the setting then switch will show the alarm status Buttons Add new ERPS Click to add a new ERPS entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previou
100. EP An outer C S tag depending on VLAN Port Type is added with this VID Entering O means no TAG added This MAC The field will display the MEP device MAC address Switch will detect the MEP device MAC address The MAC of this MEP can be used by another MEP when unicast is selected Info only Alarm The field will display the MEP alarm data There is an active alarm on the MEP Buttons Add new MEP Click to add a new MEP entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the information manually 170 LGB5124A User Manual 3 23 EPS The chapter describes the Ethernet Protection Switching EPS Ethernet Linear Protection Switch instances are configured here Web Interface To configure the EPS in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration EPS 2 Click Add new EPS then you can create a new EPS entry on the switch 3 Assign each parameter to add new EPS 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 Click Refresh and switch will update the EPS table manually Figure 3 24 1 The EPS Configuration Ethernet Protection Switching Refresh Delete EPSID Domain Architecture W Flow P Flow W SF MEP P SF MEP APS MEP Alarm Ad new EPS Save Reset Ethernet Protection Switching Refresh Delete EP
101. Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLDv2 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLDv2 Information Table The default is 20 entries The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLDv2 Information Table Web Interface To display the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information in the Web interface Click Configuration MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information If you want to auto refresh the information check the Auto refresh box Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The IPv6 SSM Information MLDv2 Information Autorehesh 1 Start from VLAN 1 and Group 00 with 20 entries per page VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description MLDv2 Information Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group eo Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently the system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can
102. Flow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here One Collector is supported This page allows for configuring sFlow collector IP type sFlow collector IP Address Port Number for each sFlow Collector 3 18 1 Collector The Current field displays the currently configured sFlow Collector The Configured field displays the new Collector Configuration Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent Collector 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to IP Type to choice with IPv4 or IPv6 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 1 The sFlow Collector Configuration sFlow Receiver Configuration Configured Current Receiver ld 1 1 IP Type IPV4 IPv4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port 6343 6343 Time Out 0 0 Datagram Size 1400 1400 151 Parameter description e Receiver Id The Receiver ID input fields allow the user to select the receiver ID It indicates the ID of this particular sFlow Receiver Currently one ID is supported and one collector is supported IP Type A drop down list to select the type of IP of Collector is displayed By default IPv4 is the type of Collector IP type You could use IPv4 or IPv6 e IP Address Enter the address of a reachable IP into the text box This IP is used to monitor the sFlow sa
103. LGB5124A lt gt BLACK BOX NETWORK SERVICES CONSOLE ats Customer Order toll free in the U S Call 877 877 BBOX outside U S call 724 746 5500 Support FREE technical support 24 hours a day 7 days a week Call 724 746 5500 or fax 724 746 0746 Inf ti Mailing address Black Box Corporation 1000 Park Drive Lawrence PA 15055 1018 JUS et Web site www blackbox com E mail infoO blackbox com LGB5124A User s Manual 24 Port SFP Gigabit Managed Switch Eco Firmware version 2 42 Compatible Black Box SFPs Compatible Black Box SFPs Part Number Product Name LFP401 LFP404 155 Mbps Extended Diagnostic SFP LPF411 LFP414 LFP416 1250 Mbps Extended Diagnostic SFP The LGB5124A only supports LFP416 with auto mode of link speed on Ports 1 20 and does not support LFP415 Purpose Audience Disclaimer FCC Warning FCC Caution CE mark Warning bout This Manual This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the LGB5124A The manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment consequently it assumes a basic working knowledge of general switch functions the Internet Protocol IP and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Black Box Network Services shall not be liable for damages of any kind including but not limited to punitive consequential
104. MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities 97 Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD oOo a Bb W N Inventory 7 Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and o
105. Management Statistics Auto etiesh O Refesh Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP 0 0 0 HTTPS 0 0 0 SNMP 0 0 0 TELNET 0 0 0 SSH 0 0 0 Parameter description eo Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch e Received Packets Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the Access Management Statistics information manually or to clear all entries 219 4 9 SSH This section shows you to use SSH Secure SHell to securely access the Switch SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication Web Interface To configure a SSH Configuration in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the SSH Configuration Mode 2 Click Save Figure 4 9 1 The SSH Configuration SSH Configuration Mode Enabled v Parameter description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation
106. N ACC AEE EAE iced REE A TRTA AT RA EANET EERTE OA EASE SEAE 25 BON ATAD E EA O A A ATA AA A O Da 26 CONFIGURATION vssccsssscscstecscacscvescocoessevevsossuvescsusnsebensstecscaeseceseossesesousencnsonceusnsssesscavcptnens 29 BEL PORT Sires ranore E A edad ds ec tes 29 BALL CONPISUPAON ii da 29 31 2 Port DESCHIPUON saute tes tewed telah ows e dees ed sabi ii taa 31 IAE Traffic OVERVIEWS ia it 32 S214 Detailed Stats a A a a da 33 BALD OOS ASOC ii A dis 35 IL OSEP Informal anita tdi 36 A DA EE NE E A edt E AEAEE AEE 37 O OR AC 38 EU E IN OT ASAS RAIN AR O RA DA NAA RO AD EE 39 TD DL ROCA MUCOSA A A E EA EASE AEA 40 3 2 ACCESS CONO LAS A A A A A AEA E A ETE A do Tdi 41 TDS ACA US a a aaa a NN at Aa a ea e 44 JS AGGREGATION ices eeraa ea O NR 45 So rte Pel DESY 01 4 RE 11 cp RPE ERECT AEE E ATETA E EEE N TALTS TETT IA NEE ET 45 SHS leds Statie Tronk AAA NN 45 ID MA CO E AEE E A N E E A A AEAT 47 E EA A A E E DO 47 323 22 YSTEM Stats a td AA AAA A AAA 49 3 3 2 3 Port Status 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics 3 4 SPANNING TREE id dada FAS BYU SE SONES LAA A A A A A A A AR 24 2 MSTT Mapping AS A A A da eh TES 3 4 3 MS TIPON eS La ae ri TLE A A A A A E E E AE E I AA CISL POSEA AE DATA A SEA EA T A OEO A aes EEL E fe EL POPS E A A O ce o a sae IA Bride ATUS A A A A E NN Reus ete See E E AE petiolate nas ee eles atts Shree IA POKES A dida FIMRS TP tia A AA eaten Ad do DD sd ANSIGNCE sicacts cess cae tastes ses c sates E SR Ss AG
107. OM ADE Sad a a a a iaaa 214 47 3 Port Slats iea A ERE AS NIE ERE ESE LSA 216 4 8 ACCESS MANAGEMENT ai Sa 217 ALBA CONfISUL ALON LA A A da 217 AZ STATES Poste A A A A la 219 BeOS A RO 220 ALONE Scsi AA AA A A A A A A AAA E 221 A 11 ATTE METHOD isa 222 MAINTENANCE AA odesadewse sd gesabedsas essescossscedseas 223 521 RESTART DEVICE pennan A BRR Rn Ts Ree 223 5 2 FIRMWARE 3 4080 Su ALA BIA ASR RISA a od BI Rn eA rs 224 5 2 1 Kirmware Upgrade stirs lai A A A kU A tea obese dads 224 5 222 Firmware DC CCOO A A RAI EAE ERE RM I 225 3 3 SAVE RESTORE tios 227 3 3 1 Factory DefdullS ui siea AAA A A Ai 227 TEL SAV EO SUA och Reh AA AOS EERE a E Rais Bae eae as 227 eE RS SAV OHO S A AEE dss e et en ad POI abn 228 SIA RESTOS Vii AE EA AA TASA EA AA Maleate Eee 228 S A EXPORTY IMPOR Ti aa EEO 229 DAS EXPOIECO IE A A A AA EES 229 D4 DZ Import Confio n eenei AAA A a ti 230 S 5 DIAGMOSTICS ta ib 231 DIA PAE A A AAA E A E a te ee 231 A A A RN 232 S253 MAP A a as 233 A GLOSSARY OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT ccccccccocscssscssssssssssnsesecscssccccescscccescesescssscsessseseenees 234 ROO 234 Carat o ons EE A S GSI os ES E A Os Cesk 235 Y E AR ANA AAA AAA 235 1 PRALE AE D TR ORO OSA ORAR hae aaa 236 Y E O NN 237 1 E A EA E EE RE ON NN 237 Di A PENT e ER 238 lA AE NO RE REIR EN EEE TCT EEN INE IRA A AN O ER A REL OPE IA 239 AA A O RA A A EEEE EEA E OA les asa A OT 240 DN RO ONO NR AR ad ae Me At oh 240 O EE ea A Pee re peer e Ud e rta ads
108. Port 0 Port 1 Ring Interconnected Virtual Major harm ID 0 SF MEP SF MEP APS MEP APS MEP Type Node Channel Ring ID 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Major Add new Protection Group Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Refresh Delete ERPS Port Port Port0 SF Port 1 SF PortO Port1 Ring Interconnected Virtual Major e ID 0 1 MEP MEP APS MEP APSMEP Type Node Channel Ring ID 1 w 6 1 2 1 2 Sub Yes Yes 0 Add new Protection Group Save l Reset Parameter description Delete This box is used to mark an ERPS for deletion in the next Save operation ERPS ID Protection group 1D The ID of the created Protection group Click on the ID of an Protection group to enter the configuration page Port O E Port This will create an East port of the switch in the ring Port 1 W Port This will create a West port of the switch in the Ring As interconnected sub ring will have only one ring port W port is configured as 0 for interconnected sub ring 0 in this field indicates that no west port is associated with this instance Port O SF MEP E SF MEP The field you need to assign the East Signal Fail reporting MEP Port 1 SF MEP W SF MEP The West Signal Fail reporting MEP Only one SF MEP is associated with an interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no west SF MEP is associated with this instance Port O APS MEP E APS M
109. Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tu is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 15 2 5 Syslog The Syslog is a standard for logging program messages It allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them It can be used as well a generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms 2 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the system log and provide a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms Web Interface To configure Syslog configuration in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Syslog 2 Specify the syslog parameters includes IP Address of Syslog server and Port number 3 Evoke the Sylog to enable it 4 Click Save Figure 2 5 1 The System Log configuration _ ____ e System Log Configuration Server Mode Disabled v Server Address 1 Ser
110. Relay Information Mode Disabled v Relay Information Policy Replace v Parameter description Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security considerations Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain Relay Information Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation Relay Information Policy 190 LGB5124A User Manual Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it w
111. S Can hse OSL eet as teas Mae a 329 2 Port CONSUL AMON chow dic A A Ces atecds O R III TOTES ACUSA A A A Sa 3 0 1GMP SNOOPING riada a tt AA aaa S20 1 BASIC CONfISUNALION at A A ir 1902 VEAN Configuration oio nee i a E ada 3 33 Fort Group PUtri e cuts Sk cute RE ube E I E E R E E E ER ER TENA TUS E EA AA A AA AA AAA RA A Eas 39S Group ANON IMGLION AA A A A nas es TEIR IDO TPV4 SSM inf Ora On AA A AA AA dood ta seas a es 3 0 MED SNOOPING ita A A E RE A Ia IO BASIC CONSULTA Ii A AA A A Ei 3 6 2 VEAN Confi oural Ona A A A Sas Soe oe esteee ISS 3 6 3 Port Group Filtering oerrinne E E A A A AA A ae Rees 36 4 AUS A AA A A AAA A A Terre 36 3 Group Inform tor enri ein re A AA A wees teas ep eee FOO LLVO SS MERO FEMALE rd S27 A CONPISUPATION A A A AEIR 37 2 Groups NfOTMALION nnrir ra ees A A vd A pa sel vad Das eee Se INDICAS OS A A A A A bie sstbuat vals ep eevee 381 EEDP COMP Urat ON e LI AA AAA JSZ EE DP NE gi AA A A A A A es Ss 328 3 LEDP MED Configuratio aenieei AAA O AA DE SARA YAA Dl dns JALOL VLAN Membership A A A AA a B LOD ROMS E a UD E ESA ATR Tits a EEE B LOSS WICHSIOLUS li A TA A ST E AAA DE AT A ONE ER A SE AUIE POLE STOLUIS tks A o cried NA BoD IABRVALE Y ANS E A 1B em 5 o TE dats tend E CIN E lt tt incas 3 10 5 1 Private VLANs Membership cables shee bys IO 2 Port Isolation viy in nioe A iia 3 10 6 MAC based VEAN 00 da vee ceased 3 10 6 1 CONTIGUA ION enn tornando 3 10 622 Status RO 3 107 PROTOCOL BA
112. S Configuration QoS Ingress Port Classification Port QoSclass DPlevel PCP DEI TagClass DSCP Based 1 Ov ov Ov jo Disabled 2 ov ov Ov 0y Disabled 3 Ov ov Om 10 Disabled 4 Ov ov ox joy Disabled O 5 Ov Ov Ov 0x Disabled a 6 Ov Ov Ov jo Disabled a 7 ov ov Ov ov Disabled 8 ov ov ov lov Disabled O 9A ov ov Ov jox Disabled a 10A Ov Ov ox jo Disabled d 9B Ov ov Ovi joy Disabled al 108 Ov ov Ov jox Disabled 131 Parameter description eo Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e QoS class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of O zero has the lowest priority e DP level Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way eo PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames e DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping e DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally an
113. SED VEAN aia AE NNA tai odas 3210 71 ProtoCol to Group iii a a a AEE EE 3 10 2752 GROUP to VLAN ici isa AIN A NN E E E E OAT SALI SA ICON LULA A td RNA ias SL PAG LEAT 4 LOR se A A A PREECE POLE TEST OTN OCS TISAI CR TIO E BREE PO A FLIA CON BULQUON AA AA saad al Sidhe AI dad aloes kes TELL ASUS AAA cutie es secu Meads A A AS BALA CONSUL AUON LA A A A E AS BaD ALD SGUSTCS AAA A A A BALI A Confie urano A A A A saa a ides acc R AEA DELI LIS US cess AA A cuties abate A dene sda sess AS Ba DOA PO OC OS CAI A A A A E Thea ERT ISO ZP OTE POCA A A A A E at ERA test E R BLO 3 PORTES CAC dul Er Ed AAA A A A IELOA POTES NOPAL DEA AAA AA AAA AAA Oe een 3216 9 Port Lag REMAKING ni NE E A A A A ah aa 3 166 POTEDS CR A A GABE oN Sa ona Bah tate eka haba 3216 7 DSCP BaSed DOS Li A ths NE A WEE ve ei ee A aha 3216 8 DSCRIFARS AMONIO henna vi LGB5124A User Manual SALO9DSGCP Classification iste A ion obs sSagee apbedade A ina 145 3 16 10 QoS Control List Configuration cccccccccccecccscceseceeeseeeeessessecnsessessecssecsecssceeceeeesseresereeresersenteess 146 IDOL AO CESTALUS A A AA th cag Gh BEG Bane aa alto A A A aha AAA 149 IELOA DS COTMECONTFO A A A tt E A E EN 150 3187 S FEOW AGENT sud dad SP 151 SALSA EOI LEI ELANA NEEE E A TEE A EE 151 BAL REST A AE E E A A E A 153 3 19 MIRRORING ni merenn aan a dian HA A Re Le ne a ee 154 3 20 TRAP EVENT SEVERITY ii ls 156 3 2 SMTP CONFIGURATION Sin A ai 157 322 802 IAHOA MA A
114. SH O O o Ada new entry_ Save Parameter description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry 217 HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 218 LGB5124A User Manual 4 8 2 Statistics This section describes detailed statistics for the Access Management including HTTP HTTPS SSH TELNET and SSH Web Interface To configure an Assess Management Statistics in the Web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 8 2 The Access Management Statistics Access
115. SID Domain Architecture W Flow P Flow W SF MEP P SF MEP APS MEP Alarm Delete 1 Pot 141 1 1 1 1 1 Ethernet Prote fion Switching Refresh Delete EPSID Domain Architecture W Flow P Flow W SF MEP P SF MEP APS MEP Alarm 1 Port 1 2 1 1 1 1 A 1 e 2 Port 1 1 1 2 1 Add new EPS Save Reset Parameter description Oo Delete This box is used to mark a EPS for deletion in next Save operation e EPS ID The ID of the EPS Click on the ID of an EPS to enter the configuration page e Domain You can scroll to select the domain with Port Esp Evc and Mpls Port This will create an EPS in the Port Domain W P Flow is a Port Esp Future use Eve This will create an EPS in the EVC Domain W P Flow is an EVC Mpls Future use e Architecture Scroll this field to select architecture of EPS as 1 1 or 1 1 1 1 This will create a 1 1 EPS 1 1 This will create a 1 1 EPS o Wflow This field assigns the working flow for the EPS See Domain o Pflow 171 This field assigns the Protecting flow for the EPS See Domain W SF MEP This field assigns the working Signal Fail reporting MEP P SF MEP This field assigns the protecting Signal Fail reporting MEP APS MEP This field assigns the APS PDU handling MEP Alarm There is an active alarm on the EPS When you complete the setting then the sw
116. The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GVRP Port Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click GVRP configure 2 Specify GVRP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 13 1 The GVRP Global Configuration Refresh GVRP Mode Disable v GVRP Mode GVRP rrole Disable w Disable Disable Disable Y Disable v Disable Disable Disable v Disable v Disable v Disable Y Disable Y Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable y Disable Disable Y Disable Disable Disable v Disable Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Parameter description GVRP Mode GVRP Mode is a global setting To enable the GVRP globally select Enable from a menu and to disable GVRP globally select Disable In stacking this configuration command sends a message to all the slaves connected in a stack Default value of Global MVRP Mode is Disable Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure per port GVRP settings There are three configuration settings that can be configured on per port bases GVRP Mode GVRP rrole 122 LGB5124A User Manual 1 GVRP Mode This configuration is to enable disable GVRP Mode on particular port locally e Disable Select to Di
117. Untag This 1 No GVRP 5 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No Combined 6 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No 7 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No 8 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No 9A 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No 10A 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No 9B 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No 10B 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be Unaware C port S port or Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID e Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If 110 LGB5124A User Manual ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged eo UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVI
118. Y External Enable False bs VCXO Enable False Ni Clock Frequency A PTP Clock Configuration Port List Delete Clock Instance Device Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 i JNo Clock Instances Present ILIITA tty tt tf Delete Clock Instance Device Type 2 Step Flag Clock Identity One Way Protocol VLAN Tag Enable VID PCP Delete _ 0 Ord Bound True Y 00 40 c7 ffe 80 81 82 False_Y Ethemet_ Y 0 oy Add New PTP Clock Save Reset Parameter description e One_pps_mode This Selection box will allow you to select the One_pps_mode configuration The following values are possible 1 Output Enable the 1 pps clock output 2 Input Enable the 1 pps clock input 3 Disable Disable the 1 pps clock in out put 175 e External Enable This Selection box will allow you to configure the External Clock output The following values are possible 1 True Enable the external clock output 2 False Disable the external clock output e VCXO _ Enable This Selection box will allow you to configure the External VCXO rate adjustment The following values are possible 1 True Enable the external VCXO rate adjustment 2 False Disable the external VCXO rate adjustment e Clock Frequency This will allow setting the Clock Frequency The possible range of values is 1 25000000 1 25 MHz PTP Clock Configuration e Delete Check
119. _mode configured 1 Output Enable the 1 pps clock output 2 Input Enable the 1 pps clock input 3 Disable Disable the 1 pps clock in out put e External Enable Shows the current External clock output configuration 1 True Enable the external clock output 2 False Disable the external clock output e VCXO_Enable Shows the current VCXO rate adjustment configuration 1 True Enable the external VCXO rate adjustment 2 False Disable the external VCXO rate adjustment e Clock Frequency Shows the current clock frequency used by the External Clock The possible range of values are 1 25000000 1 25 MHz e Clock Instance Indicates a particular Clock Instance 0 3 Click on the Clock Instance number to monitor the Clock details Device Type Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types 1 0rd Bound Clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock 2 P2p Transp Clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock 3 E2e Transp Clock s Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock 4 MastrOnly Clock s Device Type is Master Only 178 LGB5124A User Manual 5 SlaveOnly Clock s Device Type is Slave Only e Port List Shows the ports configured for that Clock Instance e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 179 Chapter 4 Securit
120. a unicast Slave the only clocks you need to configure are the master clocks to request Announce and Sync messages from See Unicast Slave Configuration VLAN Tag Enable Enables the VLAN tagging for the PTP frames Gi Note Packets are only tagged if the port is configured for vlan tagging i e Port Type Unaware and PortVLAN mode None VID VLAN Identifier used for tagging the PTP frames PCP Priority Code Point value used for PTP frames Buttons Add new PTP Clock Click to add a new clock instance Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 177 3 22 2 Status This chapter allows the user to monitor the PTP configuration status and inspect the current PTP clock settings Web Interface To monitor the PTP status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration PTP then status 2 Evoke Auto refresh to enable the switch to update the PTP status automatically 3 Click Refresh to update the Status information manually Figure 3 22 1 The PTP status PTP External Clock Mode Auto refresh Refresh One_PPS_Mode Disable External Enable False VCXO Enable False Clock Frequency 1 PTP Clock Configuration Port List Clock Instance Device Type 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 9 10 11112 13 14 15 15 17 18 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 Y Ord Bound 1 Ord Bound Parameter description e One_pps_mode Shows the current One_pps
121. adcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Web Interface To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Storm Control Configuration 2 Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control 3 Scroll to set the Rate Parameters 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 12 The Storm Control Configuration Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast a 1 v Multicast a 1 v Broadcast C 1 v 150 LGB5124A User Manual Parameter description Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type eo Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 18 s Flow Agent The s
122. addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the Port Security Switch Status information manually 215 4 7 3 Port Status This section shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be
123. ample Apt 42 93 e Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes that apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VolP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Di
124. and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X 197 In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggyback on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics a
125. are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type Ethernet Type The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames NOTE An Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames 42 LGB5124A User Manual Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the
126. at can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 the switch only fowards the IP packets that are matched in static entries on the specific port o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 181 4 1 2 Static Table The section describes how to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Save Figure 4 1 2 The Static IP Source Guard Table Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLANID IP Address MAC address E dd new entry AA Static IP Soufce Guard Table Delete Port VLANID IP Address MAC address Delete 1 Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save o Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The vlan id for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e IP Mask Used for calculating the allowed network with IP address MAC address Allowed Source MAC address e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard tab
127. attention to related features or instructions WARNING Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury 111 CAUTION Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data or damage the system or equipment iv LGB5124A User Manual Table of Contents INTRODUCTION A Sedesieccauade cd aacdesivasavescedseseseds0daeeseees ees se aso ssddsesaeesced ocseseosedsedsdeesed godeaveseed 1 OPERATION OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT esesessssssosososooooooeoeoececcceesesesesososooosososesese 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION oaks scsssssecceses testers sues siccehses suate das ENRE AESA REPE ESEA KESE EAEE SEREA 4 2 1 SYSTEM INFORMATION Sweticsestetsvexzensy evs Suess cada de avhevbek E Nar ee 4 DET LInfOTMA Oates 4 DEL 2 CONJISUFAIO iaa ta ads 6 De 2ST IME eo ets o A e o dl cul a o E E Al RT De e a e 7 AA AAA NN 7 DEP D NEP da io a dt a dba 9 ZE ACCOUNT A e e EE AT diles 10 DO LUST a ti la td sli 10 D232 Privilege Level AA NN 11 al ARA AI TR OI A TS ER E ANA 13 DAL AR VAC tater O Md a Dad bo 13 DEA DTP VG A A A dd oy hd 15 SO A OO 16 DL CONSUL AA EE ETE A EAS EA tinci n mada 16 AAN EA E E EAA EETA TEE TEE SEEE 17 229 9 Detaled O ARAE EN EAE E AE AEE E E E 18 ALSIN l rA ERRA EA AAEE AT PE EEE E E NN A O ANA E A AEA 19 O EES A U EAE E EEEE E E NN 19 PAE 0 2 EUT ATEA A A AN A A T 20 DAO D ET A AS IE EEA I AEE A AS RR NN 21 D204 KEE 11 EAE AE AEE E A A EE E E EA E T EA AEE E 23 LA E A AAE AA ETTET TEE A ELA E NN 24 D
128. ay the configure SNMP Users in the Web interface 1 Click SNMP Users 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 6 3 The SNMP Users Configuration SNMPv3 Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Save SNMPv3 Users Configuration Delet User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy shoe Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password Delete Auth Priv MD5 DES Parameter description e Delete Click on this button to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of the security level cannot be modified if an entry already exists Ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are None No authentication protocol 21 MD5 An optional flag to indicate tha
129. bject to specific QoS class QL QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It guarantees a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources R RARP RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionality that is used by a MEP to indicate defects detected to the remote peer MEP RSTP In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides fo
130. bled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design To cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured 207 RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation o Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server o S
131. c PDU s Tx Unsupported Codes Tx Link Fault PDU s ojo Rx Duplicate Error Event Notification Rx Loopback Control Rx Variable Request Rx Variable Response Rx Org Specific PDU s Rx Unsupported Codes Rx Link Fault PDU s ololo jololjojojoolojo olojojolojojo o Rx Dying Gasp Tx Dying Gasp Rx Critical Event PDU s Tx Critical Event PDU s 0 Parameter description o Port Scroll to select which port you want to monitor detailed Link OAM events lt shows the switch port number e Rx and Tx OAM Information PDUs The number of received and transmitted OAM Information PDUs Discontinuities of this counter can occur when you re initialize the management system Rx and Tx Unique Error Event Notification A count of the number of unique Event OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Event Notifications may be sent in duplicate to increase the probability of successfully being received in case a frame may be lost in transit Duplicate Event Notification transmissions are counted by Duplicate Event Notification counters for Tx and Rx respectively A unique Event Notification OAMPDU is indicated as an Event Notification OAMPDU with a Sequence Number field that is distinct from the previously transmitted Event Notification OAMPDU Sequence Number Rx and Tx Duplicate Error Event Notification A count of the number of duplicate Event OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Event Notification OAMPDUs may be sent in dupli
132. cate to increase the probability of successfully being received given the possibility that a frame may be lost in transit A duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU is indicated as an Event Notification OAMPDU with a Sequence Number field that is identical to the previously transmitted Event Notification OAMPDU Sequence Number Rx and Tx Loopback Control A count of the number of Loopback Control OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Variable Request A count of the number of Variable Request OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface 167 LGB5124A User Manual Rx and Tx Variable Response A count of the number of Variable Response OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Org Specific PDU s A count of the number of Organization Specific OAMPDUs transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Unsupported Codes A count of the number of OAMPDUs transmitted on this interface with an unsupported op code Rx and Tx Link fault PDU s A count of the number of Link fault PDUs received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Dying Gasp A count of the number of Dying Gasp events received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Critical Event PDU s A count of the number of Critical event PDUs received and transmitted on this interface Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh cl
133. ck Configuration MRSTP Port Configuration Scroll to select the instance you want to assign to the Port Scroll to select includes Path Cost Priority Admin Edge and Admin P2P parameters Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Dun Figure 3 5 2 The MRSTP Port Configuration MRSTP Port Configuration Port Instance Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Admin P2P t lt M lt gt v lt gt M lt gt lt gt v 1 None Auto 128 yv Edge Auto E 2 None Auto v 128 v Edge Auto v 3 None Auto v 128 v Edge w Auto v 4 None Auto v 128 Y Edge Auto v 5 None Auto v 128 Y Edge vw Auto v 6 None Auto 128 v Edge Auto v 7 None Auto 128 Edge Auto y 8 None Auto v 128 m Edge v Auto v 9 None Auto 128 v Edge v Auto 10 None Auto v 128 v Edge Auto v 11 None Auto v 128 v Edge w Auto v 12 None Auto hs 128 Y Edge w
134. cking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh thePort Security information manually e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 213 4 7 2 Switch Status This section shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the Web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 7 2 The Port Security Switch Status O tes 1 2 3 4 5 1 El 3A 10A 98 108 Parameter description e User Module Legend The legend shows a
135. consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 D NOTE Special characters and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information manually 117 3 10 7 2 Group to VLAN This section allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected switch unit in the switch stack Web Interface To Display Group Name to VLAN mapping table configured in the Web interface 1 Click Group Name VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID 3 Click Save Figure 3 12 7 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 No Group entries Aa new ento Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Auto refresh 7 Refresh Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9a 108 98 108 Delete Add new entry Parameter des
136. coos 20oo0o0o0o0oooooo 2000000 o0oooo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YA 0A 9B 0B bs Parameter description eo Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port e Auto refresh Select the auto refresh checkbox to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click the icons to refresh the LACP port statistics information or clear manually 51 3 4 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links that automatically take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device that incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging
137. cription e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of at most 16 characters that consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed The Group name that you try map to a VLAN must be present in the Protocol to Group mapping table and must not have been used previously by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLANID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 O Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry 118 LGB5124A User Manual o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Auto refresh Check the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information au
138. cs Q Retesh Port Peer MAC Failed Count 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 0A ER Ea REPS aia A RESA E E ET S a K RRI SIS BE Ki RES EA RI SE 88 Parameter description e Port The Port column lists all ports that show per port MRP statistics eo Peer MAC Peer MAC is the MAC address of the neighbor Switch from which the MRP frame is received eo Failed Count e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the MRP Port configuration information by manual 127 3 15 MVRP The Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP defines an MRP application that provides the VLAN registration service MVRP provides a mechanism for dynamic maintenance of the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and for propagating the information they contain to other Bridges This information allows MVRP aware devices to dynamically establish and update their knowledge of the set of VLANs that currently have active members and through which Ports those members can be reached 3 15 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic MVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure MVRP Port Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click MVRP configure 2 Specify MVRP Confi
139. d Disabled Y Receiver Disabled 9 Disabled Receiver v Disabled Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled 2 Disabled Receiver v Disabled Parameter description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR e VLANID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port eo Type Specify the MVR port type on the port 84 LGB5124A User Manual e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 7 2 Groups Information The section describes how to display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Information in the Web interface Click Configuration MVR Groups Information To auto refresh the information check the Auto refresh box Click the Refresh button to refresh a entry of the MVR Groups Information Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry hon Figure 3 7 2 The MVR Groups Information MVR Groups Information Auto vefresh O Start from VLAN 1 add group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 11 12 No more en
140. d EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication o Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID 201 e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the NAS Switch Status manually 202 LGB5124A User Manual 4 5 3 Port Status The section provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication Web Interface To configure a NAS Port Status Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify the Port that you want to check 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 5 3 The NAS Statistics Admin State Force Authorized Port State Authorized Receive EAPOL Counters Transmit EAPOL Counters 0 Total
141. d Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds and the default unsolicited report interval is 1 second e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click on these icons to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually or to go to the next up page or entry o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 6 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes how to set the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping function On the Ul you can add a new filtering group and safety policy Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration 2 Click the Add new Filtering Group 3 Specify the Filtering Groups with entries per page 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 79 Figure 3 7 3 The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups __ Add new Filtering Group___ Save Reset Delete Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings You can enable the port to join filtering groups e Filtering Groups The IP Mul
142. d is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over IGMPv3 Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed 75 o Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Auto refresh Click on the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click on these icons to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually or go to the for next up page or entry 3 6 MLD Snooping A network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an indirect participant in MLD snooping it just provides multicast traffic and MLD doesn t interact with it NOTE A application such as desktop conferencing a network node may act as both a source and an MLD host but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an MLD host A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address In IPv6 addresses with the first eight bits set that is FF as the first two characters of the address are multicast addresses and any node that listens to
143. d revert to previously saved values 132 LGB5124A User Manual 3 16 2 Port Policing This section provides an overview of QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually maintain a steady rate of traffic Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Policing 2 Choose the port to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and type the Rate limit condition Scroll to select the Rate limit Unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps 4 Click Save to save the configuration Figure 3 16 2 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration QoS Ingress Port Policers Port Mode Rate Unit Flow Control 500 lt gt v 1 O 500 kbps 2 a 500 kbps O 3 500 bps a m 500 kbps E 500 kbps Y O 6 500 kbps a o m 500 kbps O 8 O 500 kbps a 9 O 500 kbps O 14 O 500 kbps O 9B a 500 kbps a 108 a 500 kbps O Save Parameter description o Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Enabled Enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function for this port o Rate
144. dde ed STAT ITE pin a Tee 241 Pi A A A A A es 241 E A A E E EN A A E TA A Bh Bete 242 Re Boece E ERE A E A EEA NI NN TAN 243 A nia Lala 243 A NN 245 A 246 Mit A A E A ld 246 viii LGB5124A User Manual DELETE THIS PAGE INTRODUCTION Overview This user s manual explains how to install and connect your network system to configure and monitor the LGB5124A through its built in CLI and Web via the RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet ports Examples of hardware and software functions are shown as well as the examples of the operation for Web based interface and command line interface CLI The LGB5124A 24 Port SFP Gigabit Managed Switch Eco from Black Box provides a reliable infrastructure for your business network The switch s intelligent features help improve the availability of your critical business applications protect your sensitive information and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively It s ideal for entry level networking LGB5124A 24 Port SFP Gigabit Managed Switch Eco has 20 100 1G SFP ports and 4 Combo Gigabit TP 100 1G SFP in a single device e 12 features improve management security QoS and performance e High port count design with all Gigabit Ethernet ports Supports guest VLAN voice VLAN Port based tag based and Protocol based VLANs Meets 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet standard Features 32K MAC table Conforms to IPv6 IPv4 Dual stac
145. de resulting from the auto negotiation In today s switched networks most links are running in full duplex mode The result may be half duplex in this case the port will not fast transition to Forwarding state If it is set as True the port is treated as point to point link by RSTP and unconditionally transitioned to Forwarding state If it is set as False fast transition to Forwarding state will not happen on this port Default Auto Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 66 LGB5124A User Manual 3 5 3 Port Status The section describes how to configure a MRSTP Port status table You will see the MRSTP configuration result each port that joins the MRSTP group and its statistics Web Interface To view the MRSTP Port status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MRSTP Port Status 2 Check the Auto refresh box then the switch will update the table automatically 4 Click the Refresh button then it will update the table manually Figure 3 5 3 The MRSTP Port Status MRSTP Port Status Auto refresh Refresh Port Instance Status Role PathCost PathCost Config Priority Admin Edge Admin P2P 1 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 2 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 3 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 4 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128 Edge Auto 5 None NON MRSTP none 0 0 128
146. ded values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 59 3 4 6 Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configuration you could to ask the switch to display the Bridge Status The Section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Web Interface To display the STP Bridges status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Bridges 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to check the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 6 The STP Bridges status STP Bridges Auto refresh L Root Topology Topology eel fhe aha ID Port Cost Flag Change Last CIST 80 00 00 40 C7 74 00 C9 80 00 00 40 C7 74 00 C9 0 Steady Parameter description o MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Brid
147. dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value is relevant Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID f
148. dge of the network policy LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk of losing an LLDP frame during transmission between neighbors we recommended that you repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbors receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count you can specify the number of times the fast start transmission will be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received NOTE LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordina
149. dresses also Web Interface To display the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information check the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information IGMPv3 Information e Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMPv3 Information Table Each page shows up to 99 entries the default is 20 from the IGMPv3 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMPv3 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMPv3 Information Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next IGMPv3 Information Table match In addition the two input fields will when you click a button assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the en
150. e 1 Click Add new Private VLAN configuration 2 Specify the Private VLAN ID and Port Members 3 Click Save 111 Figure 3 10 5 1 The Private VLAN Membership Configuration Private VLAN Membership Configuration Members Delete 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 a JAAR M M MMM MM Parameter description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Private VLAN Click to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 10 5 2 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow Each port can be configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table that has a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map ge
151. e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 220 LGB5124A User Manual 4 10 HTTPs This section shows you how to use HTTPS to securely access the Switch HTTPS is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Web Interface To configure a HTTPS Configuration in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of HTTPS Configuration 2 Select Enabled in the HTTPS Configuration Automatic Redirect field 3 Click Save Figure 4 10 1 The HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Configuration Mode Enabled v Automatic Redirect Disabled v Parameter description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect Web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation 221 4 11 Auth Method This page shows how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch stack via one of the management client interfaces Web Interface To configure a Authentication Method Configuration in the Web interface Specify the Client console telent ssh web that you want to moni
152. e Fiber Type Display the fiber mode for instance Multi Mode Single Mode e Tx Central Wavelength Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength for instance 850 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm and so on o Baud Rate Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported for instance 10M 100M 1G and so on e Vendor OUI Display the OUI code which is assigned by IEEE e Vendor Name Display the company name of the module manufacturer Vendor P N Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer 36 LGB5124A User Manual e Vendor Rev Revision Display the module revision e Vendor SN Serial Number Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer e Date Code Show the date this SFP module was made eo Temperature Show the current temperature of SFP module e Vcc Show the working DC voltage of SFP module e Moni Bias mA Show the Bias current of SFP module e Mon2 TX PWR Show the transmit power of SFP module e Mon3 RX PWR Show the receiver power of SFP module 3 1 7 EEE The section describes how the user can inspect and configure the current EEE port settings EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic use or no traffic EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port has data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The
153. e MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the Port Security Port Status information manually 216 LGB5124A User Manual 4 8 Access Management This section shows you to configure access management table of the Switch including HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN or over the Internet 4 8 1 Configuration This section shows you how to configure access management table of the Switch The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type matches any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch Web Interface To configure a Access Management Configuration in the Web interface Select Enabled in the Mode of Access Management Configuration Click Add new entry Specify the Start IP Address End IP Address Check Access Management method HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH in the entry 5 Click Save RON Figure 4 8 1 The Access Management Configuration Delete StartIP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Aeren JT En oe Mode Disabled v Delete HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET S
154. e auto refresh box to refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click on these icons to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually or to go to the next up page or entry 3 6 5 Group Information The section describes how to set the MLD Snooping Groups Information The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The default is 20 81 Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Group information in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to check the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Groups information Figure 3 6 5 The MLD Snooping Groups Information MLD Snooping Groups Information Autosetesh O Start from VLAN 1 and group address 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLANID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 No more entries Parameter description Navigating the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table selected through the entries per page input field When fir
155. e the Port detail parameters of the switch to enable or disable switch Ports and monitor the ports content or status 3 1 1 Configuration This chapter describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports to non default settings including Linkup Linkdown Speed Current and configured Flow Control Current Rx Current Tx and Configured Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode Power Control Web Interface To configure a Current Port Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Configuration 2 Specify the Speed Configured Flow Control Maximum Frame size Excessive Collision mode and Power Control 3 Click Save Figure 3 1 1 The Port Configuration Speed Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power Current Configured CurrentRx Current Tx Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control ici Auto Discard Disabled e Down Auto Discard Disabled Auto Discard Disabled Auto Discard Disabled Auto Discard Disabled j Auto Discard Disabled Auto Discard Y Disabled Y Auto Discard Y Disabled Auto Discard Disabled Auto Auto Link o z S 6 6 6 e 8 es es es ee x KKK KK KK KKK XK EIEI ES ES EA ES ES ES ES ES ES IES x XK KKK KKK KKK Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down 29
156. e the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled 46 LGB5124A User Manual Aggregation Group Configuration Locality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for stackable switches Global The group members may reside on different units in the stack The device supports two 8 port global aggregations Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port O Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 3 2 LACP Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol according to IEEE 802 3ad specification a
157. e v 11 O Auto v Active v 12 a Auto v Active Parameter description eo Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack o Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot O Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 48 LGB5124A User Manual 3 3 2 2 System Status This section describes how to set LACP function on the switch to provide a status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP System status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP System Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP System Status Figure 3 3 2 2 The LACP System S
158. ear Click on these icons to refresh or clear information manually 168 LGB5124A User Manual 3 23 Ethernet OAM The chapter describes the Ethernet OAM configuration Before you configure the Ethernet OAM you need to understand MEP Maintenance Entity Point The MEP means the Points at the edge of the domain define the boundary for the domain A MEP sends and receives CFM frames through the relay function and drops all CFM frames of its level or lower that come from the wire side Web Interface To configure the Ethernet OAM in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Ethernet OAM 2 Click Add new MEP then you can create a new MEP on the switch 3 Assign each parameter to add new MEP 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 Click Refresh and the switch will update the MEP table by manually Figure 3 24 1 The Maintenance Entity Point Configuration Maintenance Entity Point Refresh Delete Instance Domain Mode Direction Residence Port Level Flow Instance Tagged VID This MAC Alarm i Ad Maintenance Entity Point Refresh Delete Instance Domain Mode Direction Residence Port Level Flow Instance Tagged VID This MAC Alarm Delete 1 Port Mep Y Ingress Y 1 0 1 0 Add new MEP Save Reset Parameter description e Delete This box is used to mark a MEP for deletion in the next Save ope
159. ecret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch stack RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation o Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch stack TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation o Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server 208 LGB51
160. ed for normal processing IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the function that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping Port Group Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering 2 Click Add new Filtering Group 3 Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering Specify the Filtering Groups in the blank field 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 71 Figure 3 5 3 The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups f Add new Filtering Group Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port Enable the IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering function on the port e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 72 LGB5124A User Manual 3 5 4 Status After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration the switch can display the IGMP Snooping Status The section explains how to display the IGMP Snooping detail status Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Status
161. en generated since the OAM sub layer was reset encoded as a 32bit unsigned integer Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Click on these icons to refresh or clear information manually 166 LGB5124A User Manual 3 22 5 Statistics This chapter explains how to provide detailed OAM traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The displayed counters represent the total number of OAM frames received and transmitted for the selected port Discontinuities of these counters can occur when you re intialize the management system Web Interface To display the Statistics in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Statistics 2 Scroll to select which port you want to monitor the Statistics 3 Check the box next to auto refresh to update the detailed Link Events data 4 Click the Refresh icon to update the Link OAM Port statistics Figure 3 22 5 The detailed Link OAM Port Statistics Detailed Link OAM Statistics for Port 1 Port 1 Y Auto refresh C _Refresh_ Clear Receive Total Transmit Total Rx OAM Information PDU s Tx OAM Information PDU s Rx Unique Error Event Notification Tx Unique Error Event Notification Tx Duplicate Error Event Notification Tx Loopback Control Tx Variable Request Tx Variable Response Tx Org Specifi
162. er The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000 ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600 ms Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000 ms e Application Currently the only supported application is GVRP e Attribute Type Currently the only supported Attribute Type is VLAN e GARP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state machine behavior for GARP on a particular port locally e normal participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will operate normally in GARP protocol exchanges e non participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 120 LGB5124A User Manual 3 12 2 Statistics The section describes GARP port statistics http 192 0 2 1 help glossary htm gosfor all switch ports The port statistics relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GARP Port statistics in the Web interface 1 Click GARP statistics 2 Scroll to the port for which you want to display the GARP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GARP statistics information Figure 3 12 2 The GARP Port Statistics E Port Peer MAC Failed Count 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 0A 9B ss
163. er RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN centrally controls the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Oo Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual port s ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports o Guest VLAN ID Thi
164. er is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port e Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 1 1000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 100 when the Unit is Mbps e Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Oo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 138 LGB5124A User Manual 3 16 5 Port Tag Remarking The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports Others the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Tag Remarking Figure 3 16 5 The Port Tag Remarking QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking 0000000000Q IS IBIS to 100 Nim ton 142 100 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Re Tag Remarking Mode Classified v Parameter description o Port The logical port for the setting
165. erface 1 Click Configuration Static Trunk and then Aggregation Mode Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the aggregation mode function Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 3 1 1 The Aggregation Mode Configuration Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members Group ID E 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Normal 0000000 OOOO OOO OOOO MOTO OOOO OITO OOOO MOTO OOOO MONTO OOOO MOTO 4 oO TORI C O KA O O OIONOKS am A Dh O ejeje O O O O O ANO OOO O o dOCOLCIK O O O O O Reset Parameter description Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enabl
166. erface 1 Click GARP configure 2 Specify GARP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 12 1 The GARP Port Configuration GARP Port Configuration Auto refresh O Timer Values Port AE EE Leave Leave All Applicantion tan GARP Applicant Timer Timer 1 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN vw normal participant 2 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 3 200 600 10000 GVRP v VLAN normal participant v 4 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN v normal participant 5 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant Y 6 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 7 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 8 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant Y 9 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN v normal participant Y 10 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 11 200 600 10000 GVRP v VLAN normal participant 12 200 600 10000 GVRP VLAN normal participant 119 Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure GARP settings There are 2 types configuration settings that can be configured on per port bases e Timer Values e Applicantion e Attribute Type e GARP Applicant e Timer Values To set the GARP join timer leave timer and leave all timers unit is Micro second Three different timers can be configured on this page Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200 ms Leave Tim
167. es are restricted to 1 8192 seconds o Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors o CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames the switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP sta
168. es in the stack to the location of a software image and click After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and all managed switches in the stack restart the switch restarts WARNING While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards 224 LGB5124A User Manual 5 2 2 Firmware Selection The switch supports Dual image for firmware redundancy purpose You can select the firmware image for your device start firmware or operating firmware This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image Web Interface To configure a Firmware Selection in the Web interface 1 Chick Activate Alternate Image 2 Click yes to complete firmware selection Figure 5 2 2 The Firmware Selection Active Image GS1510 08 standalone dev build by edward localhost localdomain 2011 10 20T15 46 27 08 00 2011 10 20T15 46 27 08 00 Alternate Image n bk GEL2 ESW10G standalone dev build by tanks localhost localdomain 2011 10 18T10 50 50 08 00 2011 10 18T10 50 50 08 00 Activate Atemate image __J Cand Message from w bpage 2 re yo
169. esh box to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click to refresh the MVR Group information manually or to go to the next up page or entry 86 LGB5124A User Manual 3 8 LLDP The switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based method for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neighbors on a IEEE 802 local area network principally wired Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB 3 8 1 LLDP Configuration Per port you can configure the LLDP and the detail parameters and the settings will take effect immediately This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Web Interface To configure LLDP 1 Click LLDP configuration 2 Modify LLDP timing parameters 3 Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages 4 Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages 5 Click Save Figure 3 8 1 The LLDP Configuration LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters Tx Inter
170. est spanning tree priority vector Such a Port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected This parameter is None by default If set it can prevent spanning tree connectivity It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network from influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator Path Cost Displays the port path cost If the path cost shows zero the STP will get the recommended value resulting from auto negotiation of the link accordingly and display this value in the Path Cost Status field Otherwise it may show the value that the administrator set up in Configured Path Cost and Path Cost Status Priority 67 Displays the port priority Priority here means Port Priority Port Priority and Port Number are mixed to form the Port ID Port IDs are often compared in order to determine which port of a bridge would become the Root Port The range is 0 240 e Admin Edge Displays the port admin edge status If you don t set any value then it will show default value is Edge o Admin P2P Displays the port admin P2P status If you don t set any value then it will show default value is Auto e Auto refresh Click on the auto refresh box to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click this button to refresh the MRSTP port status informa
171. ets e Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets e Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters o Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions e Auto refresh To evoke the auto
172. etting as Backup Configuration 5 3 4 Restore User This section describes how to restore users information back to the switch Any current configuration files will be restored via XML format Web Interface To configure a Restore User Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Restore User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 4 The Restore the Backup Configuration Restore Backup Configuration Are you sure to restore the Backup Configuration Save Parameter description eo Buttons Save Click the Save button to restore the Backup Configuration to the switch 228 LGB5124A User Manual 5 4 Export Import This section describes how to export and import the Switch configuration Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format 5 4 1 Export Config This section describes how to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure a Export Config Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Save configuration 2 Save the file in your device Figure 5 4 1 The Restore the Backup Configuration Save configuration File Download Do you want to open or save this file Type XML Document 49 4KB From 192 168 20 22 B Desktop While files from the Internet can be usefu o 1 If you do not trus isk 5 my Documents T My Computer My Recent My Networ
173. eval support function On enabling the MIB retrieval support the DTE supports polling the contents of various Link OAM based MIB variables e Loopback Operation Enable or disable the Loopback Operation function on the Port If the Loopback support is enabled enabling this field will start a loopback operation for the port o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 159 3 22 2 Event Config This chapter explains how to inspect and change the current Link OAM Event configurations It allows you to set what kind of event triggers the 802 3ah OAM monitor and management function Web Interface To configure the Link event configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Event config 2 Check the box next auto refresh to update the Link Event data 3 Set all parameters on Link event field 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 22 2 The Link Event Configuration Link Event Configuration for Port1 Por1 y Auto refresh C Event Name Window 100msec Period Threshold RxPacket Threshold Error Frame Event 1 0 Event Seconds 60 4 Summary Symbol Period Error 1 0 0 Event Frame Period Error 1 0 0 Event Reset Parameter description e Port Members The switch port number and index for port
174. ffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signalling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VolP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration 94 LGB5124A User Manual NOTE LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints so it does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that will be mapped to the specific ports Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting inte
175. fic flooding e IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers to run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Oo Port Shows the physical Port index of switch e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port eo Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throttling Limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 69 3 5 2 VLAN Configuration The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with the IGMP Snooping function Each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table the default is 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the s
176. for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets The application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority VLAN User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as PCP Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are lear
177. g it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message 237 HTTPS ICMP HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sub layer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol tha
178. g the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the Port link Status manually 30 LGB5124A User Manual 3 1 2 Port Description The section describes how to configure the Port s alias or any description for the Port Identity The user can write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application Web Interface To configure a Port Description in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Port Description 2 Specify the detailed Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application 3 Click Save Figure 3 1 2 The Port Configuration Port Description Port Description O 3506 0 e Wh oS D gt gt 10B Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Description of device ports can not include amp e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset
179. ge ID The Bridge 1D of this Bridge instance e RootID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred e Auto refresh Select to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click on this icon to refresh the STP Bridges status information manually 60 LGB5124A User Manual 3 4 7 Port Status After you complete the STP configuration you could to ask the switch to display the STP Port Status The section explains how to ask the switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to check the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 7 The STP Port status CIST Role Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of t
180. gement VLAN can be active at a time When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route 3 10 1 VLAN Membership You can monitor and modify the VLAN membership configuration for the selected switch stack unit here Up to 4096 VLANs are supported From this page you can add and delete VLANs as well as add and delete port members of each VLAN Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the Web interface 1 Click VLAN membership Configuration 2 Specify Management VLAN ID 0 4094 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 1 The VLAN Membership Configuration VLAN Membership Configuration gt gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members Delete VLAN ID VLAN Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9aJ10a 98 108 1 default KAA A A VLAN Memb rship Configuration Refresh _ lt lt with 20 entries per page Port Members 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10A 9B 10B default MIKMAK VW WI A VLAN Name y w Add New VLAN Parameter description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the
181. ges Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 16 7 DSCP Based QoS The section explains how to configure the DSCP Based QoS mode that allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Web Interface To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Based QoS 2 Enable or disable the DSCP for Trust 3 Scroll to select QoS Class and DPL parameters 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 141 Figure 3 16 7 The DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration os al Pea ies Foe E Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted e QoS Class QoS Class value can be between 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level can be between 0 and 3 e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 142 LGB5124A User Manual 3 16 8 DSCP Translation The section describes how to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress Web Interface To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Config
182. ging Aging Time 300 seconds MAC Table Learning Port Members 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 oa 10a 98 108 Auto 0400000000000 Disable O O O O O O10 O10 O O O Secure OO OO OOO0O0000 0 Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members Delete VLANID MAC Address 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 94 10a 98 108 Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members Delete VLANID MAC Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9a 10a 98 108 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 I Ol 103 Parameter description Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds To disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries check Disable automatic aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is grayed out another module is in control of the mode so the user cannot change it An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received Disable No learning is done Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac
183. guration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 15 1 The MVRP Global Configuration Drets MVRP Mode Disable v 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9A DA E 3 Parameter description e MVRP Mode MVRP Mode is a global setting To enable the MVRP globally select Enable from the menu and to disable MVRP globally select Disable In stacking this configuration command sends a message to all the slaves connected in stack The default value of Global MVRP Mode is Disable o Port The Port column lists ports for which you can configure per port MVRP settings There are three configuration settings that can be configured on per port bases e MVRP Mode e MVRP rrole 1 MVRP Mode This configuration is to enable disable MVRP Mode on particular port locally 128 LGB5124A User Manual e Disable Select to Disable MVRP mode on this port Enable Select to Enable MVRP mode on this port The default value of configuration is disable 2 MVRP rrole This configuration is used to configure restricted role on an interface e Disable Select to Disable MVRP rrole on this port e Enable Select to Enable MVRP rrole on this port The default configuration is disable e Auto refresh Check the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh
184. he VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping because it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with commas and or spaces A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty i e not having any VLANs o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 4 3 MSTI Priorities You can implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch The CIST is the default instance that is always active It controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier The section describes how to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well 55 Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanni
185. he following values AlternatePort Backup Port RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled e CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized e Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the STP Port status information manually 61 3 4 8 Port Statistics After you complete the STP configuration then you can to enable the switch to display the STP Statistics The section explains how to ask the switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to check the Auto refresh box 3 Click the Refresh button to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 8 The STP Statistics STP Statistics Auto refresh Refresh Clear Port Transmitted Received Discarded MSTP RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown illegal No ports enabled Parameter description o Port The switch port number of the logical STP port eo MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDUs received transmitted on the port e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDUs received transmitted on
186. he setting then click Reset Figure2 6 2 The SNMPvi v2 Communities Security Configuration SNMPv1 v2 Communities to Security Configuration Delete Community UserName Source IP Source Mask public 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 idd new community SNMPv1 v2 Communities to Security Configuration Delete Community User Name Source IP Add new community Save Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as a security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string o UserName The UserName access string permits access to SNMPv3 agent The length of UserName string is restricted to 1 32 o Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask o Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask 20 LGB5124A User Manual 2 6 3 Users The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is UserName To create a new UserName account click on the lt Add new user gt button and enter the user information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 10 Web Interface To displ
187. his page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Group Information 2 To auto refresh the information check the Auto refresh box 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to the previous or next entry Figure 3 5 5 The IGMP Snooping Groups Information IGMP Snooping Groups Information Autoreftesh L Refresh gt Start from VLAN 1 and group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 104 98 108 No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table They will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table IGMP Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group eo Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Au
188. iS Save Reset Parameter description e Global State Scroll to select Enabled or disabled for the Global MRSTP state on the switch Instance Every MRSTP instance must have a unique instance ID o State To enable the specific instance the switch must have finished configuring the ID o Version To scroll to select what version you set for the unique instance with STP or RSTP 63 Priority The priority parameter used in the CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree connection O 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Hello time Available value range 1 2 In contrast with RSTP Hello Time in MRSTP that needs per port setting for the CIST Max age Available value range 6 40 sec The same definition was as in the RSTP protocol FW Delay Forwarding delay Available value range 4 30 sec The same definition was as in the RSTP protocol Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 64 LGB5124A User Manual 3 5 2 Port Configuration The chapter describes how to configure the MRSTP port After you configure the MRSTP instance then you can assign the port to join the instance and set the parameters to implement MRSTP Web Interface To configure the MRSTP Port configuration in the Web interface 1 Cli
189. ia Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar devices Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class IIT The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class Ill definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class Il classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support and inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP
190. icant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead 98 LGB5124A User Manual e Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type Choose one of the eight priority levels 0 through 7 e DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 3 8 5 EEE By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs because the EEE circuits turn off to save power and need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP Web Interface To show LLDP EEE neighbors 1 Click LLDP than click EEE to show discover EEE devices 2 Click Refresh for manual update Web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update Web screen Figure 3 8 5 The LLDP Neighbors EEE information LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Auto refresh Local Port TxTw Rx Tw Fallback Receive Tw Echo Tx Tw EchoRx Tw Resolved Tx Tw ResolvedRx Tw EEE activated No LLDP EEE information found Note If your network without any devices has the EEE function enabled the
191. ication DSCP Valid dscp value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 16 11 QCL Status The section will explain how to configure and display the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware because of hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the QoS Control List Status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QCL Status 2 To auto refresh the information check the box next to Auto refresh 3 Scroll to select the combined static Voice VLAN and conflict 4 Click the Refresh button to refresh a entry of the MVR Statistics Information Figure 3 16 11 The QoS Control List Status QoS Control Combined Auto refresh L List Status Action User QCE Frame Type Port Class DP DSCP Static 2 Any 24 7 8 10A 10B Class 2 Default Default No Static 1 Any 5 10B Class 0 Default Default No Conflict Parameter description eo User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 O0xFFFF are allowed LLC
192. ick to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel your setting e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the sFlow Sampler information manually 3 19 Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Mirror Configuration monitors the traffic of the network For example we assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Web Interface To configure the Mirror in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Mirroring 2 Scroll to select Port to mirror on port 3 Scroll to disabled enable TX Only and RX Only to set the Port mirror mode 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 154 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 20 1 The Mirror Configuration Mirror Configuration Port to mirror on Disabled v Port Mode 1 Disabled 2 Disabled 3 Disabled Disabled Disabled Y on e 6 Disabled 7 Disabled vw 8 D
193. ier Ethernet applications you can reduce operating costs and increase the remote access for maintenance Using Ethernet as a metropolitan and wide area networking technology requires a new set of OAM protocols Service provider networks are large and complex with a wide user base and they often involve different operators that must work together to provide end to end services to enterprise customers While enterprise end customer demands continue to increase so do the requirements for service provider Ethernet networks particularly in the areas of availability and mean time to repair MTTR Ethernet OAM addresses these challenges and more thereby directly impacting the competitiveness of the service provider Ethernet has been used as a LAN technology for many years and enterprises have managed these networks effectively Ethernet OAM is a broad topic but here we will focus on three main areas of Ethernet OAM that are most in need by service providers and are rapidly evolving in the standards bodies Service Layer OAM IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management Link Layer OAM IEEE 802 3ah OAM and Ethernet Local Management Interface MEF 16 E LMI Each of these different OAM protocols has unique objectives and complements the others IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management provides service management 3 22 1 Port Config This chapter explains how to inspect and change the current Link OAM port configurations It will help users unde
194. ignificantly improves network resource use while maintaining a loop free environment e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page will show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selected via a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it will show this information for all the VLAN Users by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports e Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this button to refresh the VLAN entries by manually 3 10 4 Port Status The Port Status function gathers all VLAN status information and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To display VILAN Port Status in the Web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Status 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display Port Status information Figure 3 10 4 The VLAN Port Status for Static user VLAN Port Status for Static user Static y Auto refresh Static Port PVID Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Tx Tag UVID Conflicts NAS 1 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No MVRP 2 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No ed VLAN 3 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag This 1 No MSTP 4 1 UnAware Disabled All
195. ill enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 191 4 4 2 Statistics The section describes the switch s DHCP Relay Statistics information The statistics show both Server and Client packet counters when DHCP Relay mode is enabled Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the Web interface 1 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 4 2 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Statistics Auto refresh Refresh Clear Server Statistics Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad to Server Error from Server Agent Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client Statistics Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Replace Keep Dro to Client Error from Client Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client
196. ing This protocol is used to secure that switching is bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Aggregation Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link C CC CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP
197. ing the ACE may be forwarded and learned 44 LGB5124A User Manual Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations e Auto refresh Click on the auto refresh button to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the ACL status information manually 3 3 Aggregation The Aggregation is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single
198. iously saved values Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Check the Refesh button to refresh the VLAN entries manually Press clear to clean up the VLAN table Press lt lt or gt gt to go up or down a page of the table 3 10 2 Ports In VLAN Tag Rule Setting a user can input a VID number to each port The range of VID numbers is from 1 to 4094 Users also can choose ingress filtering rules for each port There are two ingress filtering rules that can be applied to the switch The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is forward only packets with VID matching this port s configured VID The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is drop untagged frame You can also select the Role of each port as Access Trunk or Hybrid Web Interface To configure the VLAN Port configuration in the Web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN Port Configuration parameters 3 Click Save 107 Figure 3 10 2 The VLAN Port Configuration Ethertype for Custom S ports 0x ssas VLAN Port Configuration Port Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Egress Rule PVID 4 Unaware v A v Hybrid v 1 2 Unaware v a All v Hybrid v 1 3 Unaware v A v Hybrid w 1 4 Unaware v O A v Hybrid v 1 5 Unaware v a A v Hybrid w 1 6 Unaware v d Al v Hybrid v 1 7 Unaware v All v Hybrid v 1 8 Unaware v A v Hybrid v 1 9A Unaware v a A v Hybrid w 1 10A Unawa
199. isabled 9 Disabled 10 Disabled A Disabled i 12 Disabled 13 Disabled 14 Disabled 15 Disabled 16 Disabled 17 Disabled Y 18 Disabled 19 Disabled 20 Disabled Y 21 Disabled 22 Disabled Y 23 Disabled 24 Disabled 25 Disabled Y 26 Disabled Y 27 Disabled 28 Disabled Y 29 Disabled Reset Parameter description e Port to mirror on Port to mirror is also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Gi Note For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this the mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only 155 Buttons Save
200. itch will show the alarm status Buttons Add new EPS Click to add a new EPS entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the information manually 172 LGB5124A User Manual 3 23 ERPS The chapter describes Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ERPS ITU T under G 8032 recommended this to provide sub 50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology and at the same time ensuring that there are no loops formed at the Ethernet layer Ethernet Ring Protection Switch instances are configured here Web Interface To configure the ERPS in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration ERPS 2 Click Add new ERPS then you can create new ERPS entry on the switch 3 Assign each parameter to add new ERPS 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 Click Refresh and switch will update the ERPS table manually Figure 3 24 1 The ERPS Configuration Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Refresh Delete ERPS Port Port Port0 SF Port1 SF Port 0 Port 1 Ring Interconnected Virtual Major Aan ID 0 1 P MEP APS MEP APS MEP Type Node Channel Ring ID l Addi Reset hew Protection Group Savq Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Refresh Delete ERPS Port Port Port 0 rt
201. ities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both Private VLAN PTP QCE QCL In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual applications 242 LGB5124A User Manual QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs that contains QoS control entries to classify a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic o
202. k Supports s Flow Ports are easy to configure to implement the IP Phone IP Camera or Wireless environment Overview of this user s manual Chapter 1 Operation of Web based Management Chapter 2 System Configuration Chapter 3 Configuration Chapter 4 Security Chapter 5 Maintenance Appendix Glossary of Web Based Management 1 LGB5124A User Manual Initial Configuration Operation of Web based Management This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the LGB5124A through the Web user interface With this facility you can easily access and monitor status of all switches through any one port of the switch including MIBs status each port activity Spanning tree status port aggregation status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status illegal access record and so on The default values of the LGB5124A are listed in the table below P Addre 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Eimer wal 192 168 1 254 After the LGB5124A has finished configuring the IT interface you can browse it For instance if you type _http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser it will show the following screen and ask you to input a username and password to login and access authentication The default username is admin and the default password is empty The first time you access the switch enter the default username and password and then click the lt Login gt butt
203. k Places Documents 51000913 520111001 Davi disc_change_v2_5 My Documents My Computer File name config xml My Network Saveastype XML Document Cancel Parameter description Save Click the Save button to store the Configuration to the PC or Server 229 5 4 2 Import Config This section describes how to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure an Import Config Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Browser to select the config file in your device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 4 2 The Import Config em IMAGE_028 jpg E IMAGE _040 jpg My Recent IE IMAGE 041 jpg Documents E L2 GE 8 Ports PoE 3 H 25 El Meraki Fan issue t eco series product Port Mi El Meraki NAND flash Desktop WH EM EPL1000_y1 doc A Meraki NAND flash SS EM EPL1000_v1 pdF El Meraki Project MP gt Meraki Review Mer Bice Smart Switches Feature List 09212011 08 Microsoft Outlook Tea Smart Switches Feature List_20111006 xls Wi mnuCr 3816 200 E as 235x series Chipeset data_20110901 xIsx oit 201 DVT Res El 5 2326K PYT preparation meeting minutes table_201 1090 Nx Wi psqs 2310G_HW E G5 2348K_G5 2352KXx_chipset SPEC xls SE P5G5 2310G_HW IMAGE_027 jpg N ES a My Documents My Computer My Network File name
204. le Specify the Port VLAN ID IP address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Save o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 182 LGB5124A User Manual 4 1 3 Dynamic Table The section describes hhow to configure the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID IP Address and entries per page 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 1 3 The Dynamic Table O Port VLANID IP Address MAC Address o No more entres Parameter description Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP address of the entry e MAC Address Source MAC address e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click on these icons to refresh the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table manually or to go to the next previous page or entry 183 4 2 ARP Insprction The section describes how to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You could use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table 4 2 1 Configuratio
205. ll user modules that may request Port Security services e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table o Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are o Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port eo Users 214 LGB5124A User Manual Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC
206. lt lt gt gt Click the Refresh button to display the table starting from the VLAN input fields Click lt lt to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Click gt gt to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 3 5 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes how to set IGMP Port Group Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature a user can exert this type of control In some network application environments such as metropolitan or multiple dwelling unit MDU installations a user might want to control the multicast groups that a user on a switch port can belong to It allows the user to control the distribution of multicast services such as IP TV based on some type of subscription or service plan With this feature you can filter multicast joins on a per port basis by configuring IP multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports An IGMP profile can contain one or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied If an IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port the IGMP join report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group the IGMP report from the port is forward
207. mmunication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below Oo Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause
208. mples sent by sFlow Agent our switch By default The IP is set to 0 0 0 0 and a new entry has to be added to it eo Port A port to listen to the sFlow Agent has to be configured for the Collector Typ the value of the port number into the text box The value accepted is within the range of 1 65535 Configure an appropriate port number not used by other protocols By default the port s number is 6343 o Time out This is the duration during which the collector receives samples Once it expires the sampler stops sending the samples Through the management the value is set before it expires The value accepted is within the range of 0 2147483647 By default it is set to 0 Datagram Size This is the maximum UDP datagram size to send out the sFlow samples to the receiver The value accepted is within the range of 200 1500 bytes The default is 1400 bytes o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 152 LGB5124A User Manual 3 18 2 Sampler The section displays the sFlow sampler what you set or you can edit it for your requirement That will help user based on a defined sampling rate an average of 1 out of N packets operations is randomly sampled This type of sampling does not provide a 100 accurate result but it does provide a result with quantifiable accuracy Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the Web interface 1 Click Config
209. n This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Enabled and Disabled Web Interface To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration 2 Select Enabled for the specific port in the Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 2 1 The ARP Inspection Configuration Mode Disabled Translate dynamic to static Port Mode 1 Disabled 2 Disabled v 3 Disabled v 4 Disabled Y 5 Disabled v 6 Disabled v 7 Disabled v 8 Disabled v 9A Disabled 10A Disabled Y 9B Disabled v 10B Disabled v Parameter description e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection e Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 184 LGB5124A User Manual 4 2 2 Static Table The section describes how to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries Web Interface To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the
210. n the table will show No LLDP EEE information found Parameter description Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted o Tx Tw The link partner s maximum time that the transmit path can hold off sending data after reassertion of LPI Oo Rx Tw The link partner s time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold off to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep e Fallback Receive Tw The link partner s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Systems that do not implement this option default to the same value as that of the Receive Tw_sys_ tx Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values will be defined as the local link partner s reflection echo of the remote link partner s respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information
211. ncapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant NOTE Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead If the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel ongoing backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggyback on the successfully authenticated client
212. ned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 246 LGB5124A User Manual Black Box Tech Support FREE Live 24 7 Tech support the way it should be y a Great tech support is just 30 seconds away at 724 746 5500 or blackbox com lt BLACK BOX About Black Box Black Box provides an extensive range
213. nerator generates a forwarding map that is responsive to a destination address of a data packet To isolate ports on a layer 2 switch configure each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on a data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Web Interface To configure Port Isolation configuration in the Web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Isolation 2 Check the box es below the port s you want to isolate 3 Click Save 112 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 10 5 2 The Port Isolation Configuration Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A 10A 9B 10 ajaja a ajajaja jaja O ON gt wo 3 Parameter description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports e Butto
214. network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as the transport layer SPROUT Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack SSID Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one SSH SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality SSM SSM is SyncE This is an abbreviation for
215. ng Tree MSTI Priorities 2 Scroll the Priority The maximum is 240 Default is 128 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 3 The MSTI Configuration 128 5 Parameter description e MSTI The CIST is the default bridge instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 4 4 CIST Ports When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch you need to configure the CIST Ports This section describes how to inspect the to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree CIST Ports 2 Scroll and evoke to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated Port Configuration 3 Enable or disable the STP then scoll to set all parameters of the CIST normal Port configuration 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will
216. nge is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 the user can access all groups i e he is granted the full control of the device Other values need to refer to each group privilege level A user s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to access that group By default most groups privilege level 5 has read only access and privilege level 10 has read write access For system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc a user will need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 2 3 2 Privilege Level This page provides an overview of the privilege levels The switch provides user set Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels from 1 to 15 Web Interface To configure Privilege Level in the Web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Privilege Level 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save 11 Figure 2 3 2 The Privilege Level configuration Parameter description e Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS b
217. nnot be changed an the priority is highest 41 Web Interface To configure Access Control List in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Configuration 2 Click the button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list Specify the parameter of the ACE Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 6 When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page note that the Items displayed depend on various selections such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type Specify the relevant criteria to be matched for this rule and set the actions to take when a rule is matched such as Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging and Shutdown oR Ww Figure 3 2 3 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration a Remove Al Ingress Port Frame Type Action Rate Limiter PortCopy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter AE TS AS E RR y RES e A Permit Rate Limiter Disabled v Ingress Port Frame Type Port Copy Mirror Logging Disabled Shutdown Counter 802 1Q Tagged VLAN ID Filter Tag Priority Save Rese J canca Parameter description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values
218. ns Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 10 6 MAC based VLAN MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame The most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds the same VLAN tag to untagged packets that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed A device may access a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On the other hand if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network through Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A do which brings security issues To provide user access and ensure data security in the meantime the MAC based VLAN technology is developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN
219. nterface To configure Factory Defaults in the Web interface 1 Click Factory Defaults 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 1 The Factory Defaults Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Parameter description eo Buttons Yes Click Yes to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration 5 3 2 Save Start This section describes how to save the Switch Start configuration Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save Start Configuration in the Web interface 1 Chick Save Start 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 2 The Save Start configuration Save as Start Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Start Configuration Parameter description eo Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Start Configuration 227 5 3 3 Save User This section describes how to save users information Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save User Configuration in the Web interface 1 Chick Save User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 3 The Save as Backup Configuration Save as Backup Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Backup Configuration Parameter description eo Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current s
220. o show the active IPv6 configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Web Interface To configure Management IPv6 of the switch in the Web interface 1 Click System IPv6 Configuration 2 Specify the IPv6 settings and enable Auto Configuration service if required 3 Click Save Figure2 4 2 The IPv6 configuration IPv6 Configuration Configured Current Auto Configuration O 192 168 1 1 Link Local Address fe80 240 c7fffe74 d1 Prefix 196 96 Gateway Reset Address 192 168 1 1 Parameter description e Auto Configuration To enable IPv6 auto configuration check this box If this fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tu is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 o Prefix
221. oS Enabled RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN ID Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled v o a Admin State Port State Sie le b al a Parameter description 194 LGB5124A User Manual O Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch stack If globally disabled all ports are allowed to forward frames Oo Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed lt does not involve co
222. ode Disabled v Port Mode Configuration Port Mode 1 Untruste Untruste Untruste Untruste 2 3 4 5 Untruste 6 Untrusted 7 Untrusted 8 Untrusted 9A Untruste 10A Untruste 9B Untruste 108 Untruste S SSS SIS SSS SN SIS Parameter description Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 187 4 3 2 Statistics The section describes how to show the DHCP Snooping Statistics information of the switch The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify the Port that you want to monitor 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 3 2 The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics
223. oes not update the time periodically without user s processing Time Zone is an offset time off GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to result in the local time otherwise you will not able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 step 1 hour Default Time zone 8 Hrs Web Interface To configure Time in the Web interface 1 Click SYSTEM NTP 2 Type in the Time parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 2 2 The NTP configuration NTP Configuration Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Server 5 Parameter description eo Serverito5s5 Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch The IPv6 address is a 128 bit value composed of eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 eo Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 9 LGB5124A User Manual 2 3 Account In this function only the administrator can create modify or delete the u
224. of networking and infrastructure products You ll find everything from cabinets and racks and power and surge protection products to media converters and Ethernet switches all supported by free live 24 7 Tech support available in 30 seconds or less Copyright 2013 Black Box Corporation All rights reserved Black Box and the Double Diamond logo are registered trademarks of BB Technologies Inc Any third party trademarks appearing in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of their respective owners LGB5124A User s Manual version 1 724 746 5500 blackbox com
225. of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled eo Port State The current state of the port It can be Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled
226. oint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class builds upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class Il and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however it does not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Med
227. on The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively the LGB5124A will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This looks inconvenient but is safer The LGB5124A supports a simple user management function allowing only one administrator to configure the system at a time If there are two or more users using administrator s identity it will allow the only the user who logs in first to configure the system The rest of users even with administrator s identity can only monitor the system Users who have no administrator s identity can only monitor the system A maximum of three users can login simultaneously to the LGB5124A NOTE When you login the Switch WEB CLI to manager you must first type the Username of the admin The password is blank after you type in the end Username press enter When the management page appears you can enter WEB CLI When you login LGB5124A series switch Web UI management you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage the switch To optimize the display effect we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6 0 or above Netscape V7 1 or above or FireFox V1 00 or above and select the resolution as 1024 x 768 The switch supports a neutral Web browser interface 2 LGB5124A User Manual NOTE DHCP is enabled on the LGB5124A but if you do not have a DHCP server to provide IP addresses to the switch use the switch default ip 1
228. on transmitted e Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 8 2 LLDP Neighbours This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP neighbors 1 Click LLDP Neighbors 2 Click Refresh for manual update Web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update Web screen Figure 3 8 2 The LLDP Neighbours information LLDP Neighbour Information Auto reftesh C Local Chassis Remote Port System Port System System Management Port ID ID Name Description Capabilities Description Address No LLDP neighbour information found Gi Note If your network without any device supports LLDP then the table will show No LLDP neighbor information found Parameter description Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit System Capabilities System Ca
229. ooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration Select enable or disable a Global configuration Select the port to become a Router Port or enable disable the Fast Leave function Scroll to set the Throttling parameter Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values OahWNDN 68 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 5 1 The IGMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled v IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 8 Proxy Enabled O Port Related Configuration Pon Router Port FastLeave Throttling lt gt v O unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited ON oanmnk Wh unlimited A unlimited 3 gt unlimited wo is unlimited QOOOUOUOUQOQOUOQOUOOO0 1000 v v E v unlimited v v v v v 10B unlimited Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traf
230. opriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto o Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 eo QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds the default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is O to 31744 in tenths of seconds and the default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicite
231. or cost of cover damages resulting from any errors in the production information or specifications set forth in this document and Black Box Network Services may revise this document at any time without notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connection to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This is a Class B device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Note Emphasizes important information or calls your
232. or the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 95 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 e DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 e Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save e Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration o Port The port number to which the configuration applies e Policy Id The set of policies that will apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 8 4 LLDP MED Neighbors This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each po
233. or to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packet when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packet when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to the circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes that represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal to the DHCP
234. other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds e Last Authentication 204 LGB5124A User Manual Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the NAS Statistics manually or to clear all entries 205 4 6 AAA This section shows you to use an AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers 4 6 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure AAA setting of TACACS or RADIUS server Web Interface To configure a Common Configuration of AAA in the Web interface 1 Set Timeout Default is 15 seconds 2 Set Dead Time Default is 300 seconds To configure a TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration of AAA in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Authorization 2 Select Enabled in the Failback to Local Authorization 3 Select Enabled in the Account To configure a RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the Web interface Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Authentication Port
235. ource IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of values or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes nolany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be a specific value range of values or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 148 LGB5124A User Manual e Action Configuration Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classif
236. pabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by System Description System Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh the LLDP Neighbors information manually 90 LGB5124A User Manual 3 8 3 LLDP MED Configuration Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end points Inventory management allowing network administrato
237. particular MRSTP region that the bridge belongs to Use this table to apply additional MRSTP configuration data and retrieve MRSTP status Web Interface To configure the MRSTP Instance parameters in the Web interface Click Configuration MRSTP Instance Scroll to select enable or disable a Global configuration Select which state and instance you will set on the switch Scroll to set Version Hello time Max age and Forwarding Del parameter Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values OahWN Figure 3 5 1 The MRSTP Instance Configuration MRSTP Instance Configuration Global State Disabled Y Instance State Version Priority Hello Time Max age FW Delay S lt gt Y ov lt gt y lt gt Y RSTP y 32768 2 RSTP x 32768 x 2 RSTP 32768 RSTP 32768 2 RSTP 32768 7 RSTP 32768 Y RSTP 32768 RSTP v 32768 RSTP x 32768 RSTP v 32768 RSTP 32768 RSTP x 32768 v 20 20 y 20 20 20 v 20 20 20 20m 20 20 20 Y a He w m 1 D 3 1e 109 1 10 in mn SHES SS IS HES IRIK K Br Bs G Bs Gs GH BH alla lt Es Es Es ILS ES EE ES ES ES ES ES Tr lo ro fro pro ro fro
238. ping Implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch The CIST is not available for explicit mapping because it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped You need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it This section describes how the user can inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the Web interface 1 2 3 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field Specify the VLANs Mapped blank field Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 54 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 4 2 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance ig Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 40 c7 74 00 d1 Configuration Revision 0 im MSTI Mapping MSTI VLANs Mapped MST MSTI2 MSTI3 MSTI4 MSTIS5 MSTI6 MSTI7 Parameter description Configuration Identification e Configuration Name The name identifying t
239. policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working with 38 LGB5124A User Manual 3 2 1 Ports The section describes how to configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Web Interface To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Ports 2 Scroll to the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 After you complete configuration then the screen will display the Counter of the port Click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information Figure 3 2 1 The ACL Ports Configuration ACL Ports Configuration Port PolicyID Action Rate LimiterlID Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter Disabled Rs 1 1 Permit Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Y 7682 Pot2 mM Disabled 2 ig Permit Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled vw Disabled v 0 Pot2 6S Disabled 3 ig Permit Disabled Y Port 1 Disabled v Disabled vw Disabled 0 Pot2 Disabled e 4 1 Permit Disabled Port 1 Disabled vw Disabled vw Disabled 0 Pot2 w Disabled 5 1 w Permit Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled 0
240. previously saved values 37 Figure 3 1 7 The EEE Configuration EEE Configuration EEE Urgent Queues Port EEE Enabled 123 45 6 7 8 1 O ajajaja jajajaa 2 O ajajaja ajajaja 3 O ajajaja jajajaa 4 O ajajaja ajajaja 5 O ajajaja jajajaa 6 O ECO 7 O ajajajaja 8 O ajajaja jajajaa 9 O ajajaja ajajaja 10 O ajajaja ajajaja Parameter description e EEE Port Configuration The EEE port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header o Port The switch port number of the logical EEE port e EEE Enabled Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port e EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 2 ACL The LGB5124A switch access control list ACL is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed forwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes IPv4 ARP protocol MAC and VLAN parameters etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port The policy number is 1 8 however each
241. r faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP SHA SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length Shaper A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues 243 SMTP SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNAP The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allows diverse network objects to participate in a
242. r is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address 209 The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server o State The current state of the server This field has one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will be re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will ref
243. r of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion eo Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear C click to refresh the Port Statistics information manually Click Clear to clean up all Port Statistics 32 LGB5124A User Manual 3 1 4 Detailed Statistics The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Web Interface To Display the per Port Port detailed Statistics Overview in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Detailed Port Statistics 2 Scroll the Port Index to select the port you want to show the detailed Port statistics overview for 3 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 4 The Port Detail Statisitcs Overview Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Receive Total Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx
244. r of supported DSCP values is 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 143 Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side Egress There are two configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from the menu that you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from the menu that you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 There is one configurable parameter for Egress side e Remap Select the DSCP value from the menu that you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 144 LGB5124A User Manual 3 16 9 DSCP Classification This section describes how to configure and map a DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 To cancel the se
245. ractive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value is relevant 6 Video Conferencing for use by
246. rame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected O Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu Listed below are the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 2 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype Ox0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry that
247. rameter affects VLAN ingress and egress processing If None is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN aware switches 108 LGB5124A User Manual If Specific the default value is selected a Port VLAN ID can be configured see below Untagged frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame Port VLAN ID Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Note The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 10 3 Switch Status The Switch Status function gathers all VLAN status information and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface Displays VLAN membership status in the Web interface 1 Click VLAN membership 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display membership information Figure 3 10 3 The VLAN Membership Status for Static user
248. ration Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name O v2c private default_rw_group default_user default_rw_group Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name vi 125323 E Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are vi Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 23 2 6 5 Views The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view The Entry index keys are OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please click on the lt Add new view gt button and enter the view information then click on lt Save gt Max Group Number 28 Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree Web Interface 1 Click SNMP Views 2 Click Add new View 3 Specify the SNMP View parameters 4 Click Save 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Rese
249. ration e Instance The ID of the MEP Click on the ID of a MEP to enter the configuration page e Domain You can scroll to select the domain with Port Esp Evc and Mpls Port This is a MEP in the Port Domain Flow Instance is a Port Esp Future use Eve This is a MEP in the EVC Domain Flow Instance is a EVC Mpls Future O Mode In the field you can scroll to select Mep or Mip MEP This is a Maintenance Entity End Point MIP This is a Maintenance Entity Intermediate Point Oo Direction 169 You can scroll to select the direction with Ingress or Egress Ingress This is a Ingress down MEP monitoring ingress traffic on Residence Port Egress This is a Egress up MEP monitoring egress traffic on Residence Port Residence Port The port where MEP is monitoring see Direction You need to assign a port to monitor the MEP status Level This is the MEG level of this MEP Shared MEGs are ETH frames that are encapsulated differently between subscriber s frames and SP s frames They share the pool of MEG levels where the customer can use 5 through 7 and the SP and operate use the rest If there is a different encapsulation then each can use all 8 levels so they are independent Flow instance The MEP is related to this flow See Domain MEP monitors the flow by sending periodic CCMs for that flow Tagged VID Port M
250. re v A v Hybrid vw 1 oB Unaware v a All v Hybrid vw 1 10B Unaware v C A v Hybrid w 1 Parameter description e Ethertype for Custom S ports This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports This is a global setting for all the Custom S ports Custom Ethertype enables the user to change the Ethertype value on a port to any value to support network devices that do not use the standard 0x8100 Ethertype field value on 802 1Q tagged or 802 1p tagged frames Port This is the logical port number of this row Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware Customer port C port Service port S port Custom Service port S custom port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All O Port VLAN Mode Configures the Port VLAN Mode The allowed values are None or Specific This pa
251. received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted 188 LGB5124A User Manual e Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the DHCP Snooping Port Statistics manually or to clear the entries 189 4 4 DHCP Relay The section describes how to forward DHCP requests to another specific DHCP servers via DHCP relay The DHCP servers may be on another network 4 4 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Relay setting including Relay Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Server IP setting Relay Information Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Information Mode Policy Replace Keep and Drop Web Interface To configure a DHCP Relay in the Web interface 1 2 3 4 5 Select Enabled in the Relay Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Specify Relay Server IP address Select Enabled in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Specify Relay Replace Keep and Drop in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Click Save Figure 4 4 1 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Disabled v Relay Server 0 0 0 0
252. resh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the RADIUS Status manually 4 6 3 Radius Details This section shows you detailed statistics of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Details Configuration in the Web interface 1 Specify the Port you want to check 2 Check Auto refresh Figure 4 6 3 The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server RADIUS Authentication Server 1 v Auto refresh Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped oc0o0o0o0o00 ocooo Other Info State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Pending Requests Timeouts oocoooo oooo Packets Dropped Other Info State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms 210 LGB5124A User Manual Parameter description e Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on
253. ridges external to a core region of the network fromj influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard o Restricted TCN If enabled this causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently o BPDU Guard If enabled this causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDUs Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well o Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media e Buttons Save Click to save changes Re
254. right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the DHCP Relay Statistics manually or to clear the entries 193 4 5 NAS The section describes how to configure the NAS parameters of the switch You can use the NAS server to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging on to the Internet 4 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure NAS setting of IEEE 802 1X MAC based authentication system and port settings The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Network Access Server in the Web interface Select Enabled in the Mode of Network Access Server Configuration Checked Reauthentication Enabled 3 Set Reauthentication Period Default is 3600 seconds 4 Set EAPOL Timeout Default is 30 seconds 5 Set Aging Peroid Default is 300 seconds 6 Set Hold Time Default is 10 seconds 7 8 9 N Check RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled Check RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Check Guest VLAN Enabled 10 Specify Guest VLAN ID 11 Specify Max Reauth Count 12 Check Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen 13 Click Save Figure 4 5 1 The Network Access Server Configuration Reet Mode Disabled Reauthentication Enabled Oo Reauthentication Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout Aging Period Hold Time RADIUS Assigned Q
255. rs to track their network devices and determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial or asset number This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VoIP devices that support LLDP MED Web Interface To configure LLDP MED Click LLDP MED Configuration Modify Fast start repeat count parameter default is 4 Modify Coordinates Location parameters Fill Civic Address Location parameters Add new policy Click Save will show the following Policy Port Configuration Select Policy ID for each port Click Save ONOaARWDNDM Figure 3 8 3 The LLDP MED Configuration Fast start repeat count A ie ee ee oo sok degrees Emergency Call Service Add new policy Delete Policy ID Application Type VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP 0 Ez m CE a ccc Jo 91 Parameter description Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information that are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowle
256. rstand the Port configuration parameter that you need to set when you enable IEEE802 3ah OAM function on the switch Web Interface To configure the 802 3ah OAM in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Port config 2 Select the Port that will enable OAM function 3 Scroll to select OAM mode with Passive or Active 4 Select the port that will support Loopback Link monitor MIB Retrieval or Loopback operation 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 22 1 The Link OAM Port Configuration Link OAM Port Configuration E 3 A MIB Monitor Retrieval Support OAM Loopback Al Loopback Enabled Mode Support mort Operation O Passive Y Passive ko bs R b hr IS b RE O KO oo ton len le loo ln degli 0000000000000100 010100100 codo 0000000000000 o000000000 E IIIT HSS HG 1 oooodoD00000000oo0o00o0mo00000000 gocoooooo0000p0b00soaapad0dd daa BB tS ee eh Ee Save Reset J Y 1 f h u 2 158 LGB5124A User Manual Parameter description e Port Members The switch port number and index for port configuration IEEE 802 3ah OAM OAM Enabled You can set OAM enable or disable on the Port Controls whether Link OAM is enabled on this switch port Enabling Link OAM enables the network operators to monitor the health of the network and quickly determine the location of
257. rt is in one of the following administrative states e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table Attached MAC Addresses e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module o State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the
258. rt on which an LLDP neighbor is detected This function applies to VoIP devices that support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP MED neighbors 1 Click LLDP MED Neighbors 2 Click Refresh to manually update the Web screen 3 Click Auto refresh to auto update the Web screen Figure 3 9 4 The LLDP MED Neighbors information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Auto refresh C No LLDP MED neighbour information found Note If your network without any device supports LLDP MED then the table will show No LLDP MED neighbor information found Parameter description o Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition 96 LGB5124A User Manual LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endp
259. ry flexible The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list QCL The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch supports advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame A super priority queue with dedicated memory has strict highest priority in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested 3 16 1 Port Classification The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port Classification parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Classification 2 Scroll to select QoS class DP Level PCP and DEI parameters 3 Click the save button to save the setting 4 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 1 The Qo
260. s Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for various situations In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACLs can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are three Web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The Web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom By default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy one ingress port or any ingress
261. s a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the ACL status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then ACL status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status Figure 3 2 4 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Status Combined Y Auto eftesh L Refresh User Ingress Port Frame Type Action Rate Limiter PortCopy Mirror CPU CPUOnce Counter Conflict Loop Detection Any ARP Deny 2 Disabled Disabled Yes No 0 No Static Policy 1 ARP Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No 34 No Static Any Any Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No 479 No Parameter description eo User Indicates the ACL user Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames NOTE Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames match
262. s are available o Force Authorized 196 LGB5124A User Manual In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply e
263. s contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level Tag Remarking Mode To scroll to select the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level Oo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the changes 139 3 16 6 Port DSCP The section will teach the user how to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that allowed you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port DSCP 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify Parameter configuration 3 Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 6 The QoS Port DSCP Configuration QoS Port
264. s is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the lifetime of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the lifetime of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the lifetime of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled e Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are o Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following mode
265. s port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module Multi 802 1X can t use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality Oo MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn
266. s their trunking method can choose their unique LACP GroupID to form a logical trunked port The benefit of using LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it becomes a ready member of a trunk group also called aggregator LACP is safer than the other trunking method static trunk 3 3 2 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member ports is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member ports is not a real trunked group Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation LACP parameters in the Web interface 1 2 Click Configuration LACP Configuration Enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific The default is Auto Scroll the Role with Active or Passive The default is Active 4 Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 47 Figure 3 3 2 1 The LACP Port Configuration LACP Port Configuration Port LACP Enabled Key Role 1 Auto v Active Y 2 a Auto v Active Y 3 d Auto v Actie 4 0 Auto v Active Y 5 F Auto v Active 6 Ci Auto v Actie Y 7 Auto v Active 8 Auto v Active 9 O Auto v Active 10 a Auto v Activ
267. sable GVRP mode on this port e Enable Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port The default value of configuration is disable 2 GVRP rrole This configuration is used to configure restricted role on an interface e Disable Select to Disable GVRP rrole on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP rrole on this port The default configuration is disable Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh theGVRP Global configuration information by manual Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 123 3 13 2 Statistics The section describes how to show the basic GVRP Port statistics for all switch ports The statistics relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GVRP Port statistics in the Web interface 1 Click GVRP statistics 2 Scroll to the port for which you want to display the GVRP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GVRP statistics information Figure 3 13 2 The GVRP Port Statistics BL tes Port Join Tx Count Leave Tx Count mb 200000000000o00 gt 200000000000 al 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9A DA 9B 0B Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can see port counters and statistics Join T
268. same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extension of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC 239 M LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP It indicates lost connectivity in the network Can be used as switch criteria by EPS MAC Table MEP MD5 Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address that shows the MAC addre
269. save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS guards access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS 240 LGB5124A User Manual NFS NTP OAM NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS gives each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name and provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions ona remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persi
270. sername and password The administrator can modify other guest identities passwords without confirming the password but will also need to modify the administrator equivalent identity Guest equivalent identity can modify his password only NOTE You must confirm administrator guest identity in the Authorization field before configuring the username and password Only one administrator is allowed to exist and cannot be deleted In addition up to 4 guest accounts can be created 2 3 1 Users This page provides an overview of the current users To login as another user on the Web server close and reopen the browser Web Interface To configure Account in the Web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Users 2 Click Add new user 3 Specify the User Name parameter 4 Click Save Figure2 3 1 The Users Account configuration Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level admin 15 A dd new user ea Add User User Settings User Name Password Password again Privilege Level 1 v Parameter description e User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Password Type in the password The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content includes ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e Password again Type the password again You must type the same password again in the field 10 LGB5124A User Manual e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed ra
271. set Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 4 5 MSTI Ports The section describes how to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well An MSTI port is a virtual port which is initiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options It contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the Web interface OaRWN Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Ports Scroll to select the MST1 or other MSTI Port Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports Scroll to set all parameters of the MSTI Port configuration Click the save button to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 58 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 4 5 The MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI Parameter description Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommen
272. sly saved values Upper right icon Refresh Click on these icons to refresh the information by manually 174 LGB5124A User Manual 3 22 PTP For Carrier Ethernet application PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems The chapter explains how to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings 3 22 1 Configuration This chapter allows the user to configure the PTP clock setting on the switch and the parameters setting values Web Interface To configure the PTP in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration PTP then Configuration 2 Scroll to select PTP External clock mode includes One_PPS Mode External Enable VCXO Enable Assign the clock frequency parameter Click Add New PTP Clock to create a new PTP entry Click the save button to save the setting To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values oak RW Figure 3 22 1 The PTP Configuration PTP External Clock Mode One_PPS_Mode Disable E External Enable False Y VCXO Enable False xi Clock Frequency 1 PTP Clock Configuration No Clock Instances Present Add New PTP Clock Sav Reset Port List Delete ClockInstance Device Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 PTP External Clock Mode One_PPS_Mode il Disable
273. ss of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frames with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring MLD MVR NAS For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to
274. st visited the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The default is 20 entries The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table match The two input fields will when you click a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address This will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD Snooping Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group Auto refresh Check on the auto refresh box to refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click on these icons to refresh the IGMP Group Status manually or go to the next up page or entry 82 LGB5124A User Manual 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information The section describes how to configure the Entries in the MLDv2 Information Table are shown on this page The MLDv2 Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Different source addresses that belong to the same group are treated as a single entry
275. stent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as the transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier Ethernet functionality MEP functionality such as CC and RDI is based on this Optional TLVs OUI PCP PD PHY A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch will include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address that forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implements the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 241 PING PoE ping is a program
276. t Figure 2 6 5 The SNMP Views Configuration Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree O default_view a anew vew J fFe Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree TC Add new view Save Parameter description e Delete Click on this button to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and its OID subtree should overstep the excluded view entry 24 LGB5124A User Manual e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk eo Save Click the Save icon to save the configuration to ROM 2 6 6 Access The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account click on the lt Add new access gt button enter
277. t defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F FTP FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features Fast Leave Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD H HTTP HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directin
278. t generates the error response for diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification similar to ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the
279. t is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are o Port The port number to which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port eo Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch stack is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool a configured maximum might not be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC
280. t this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly eo Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 22 LGB5124A User Manual 2 6 4 Groups The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group The Entry index key are Security Model and Security Name To create a new group account please check lt Add new group gt button and enter the group information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Groups in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Groups 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 6 4 The SNMP Groups Configu
281. tarting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Select enable or disable Snooping IGMP Querier Specify the parameters in the blank field 3 Click the refresh button to update the data or click lt lt or gt gt to display the previous entry or next entry 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 2 The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Le J gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLANID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Compatibility RV Ql sec QRI 0 1sec LLQI 0 1sec URI sec 1 Y Reset Parameter description e VLANID Displays the VLAN ID of the entry e Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Up to 32 VLANs can be selected e IGMP Querier A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv
282. tatus LACP System Status Auto refresh Agor ID Partner Partner Last Local 99 SystemID Key Changed Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Parameter description e AggrID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the ID is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id eo Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner eo Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port e Auto refresh Set the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click on this icon to refresh the LACP System status information manually 49 3 3 2 3 Port Status This section describes how to set LACP function on the switch then to provide a Port Status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to select Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status Figure 3 3 2 3 The LACP Status LACP Status Auto refresh C Partner Partner Port LACP Key AggrID System ID Port No z No No No No No No 8 No 9A No 10A No 9B No
283. tes Location e Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits You can specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator e Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits You can specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian e Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits You can select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings that have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance eo Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW 92 LGB5124A User
284. tes the number of symbols in the period Symbol Period Error Event Threshold This eight octet field indicates the number of errored symbols in the period required to be equal to or greater than for the event to be generated Symbol Period Errors This eight octet field indicates the number of symbol errors in the period Symbol frame Period Errors This eight octet field indicates the sum of symbol errors since the OAM sub layer was reset Event Seconds Summary Time Stamp This two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in 100 ms intervals encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Window This two octet field indicates the duration of the period in 100 ms intervals encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Threshold This two octet field indicates the number of errored frame seconds in the period is required to be equal to or greater than the event to be generated encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Events This two octet field indicates the number of errored frame seconds in the period encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer 165 Event Seconds Summary Error Total This four octet field indicates the sum of errored frame seconds that have been detected since the OAM sub layer was reset Event Seconds Summary Event Total This four octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event TLVs that have be
285. that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to the main power supply Policer POP3 A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabil
286. the MVRP Port configuration information manually 129 3 15 2 Statistics This page shows the basic MVRP Port statistics for all switch ports The statistics relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display MVRP Port statistics in the Web interface 1 Click MVRP statistics 2 Scroll to the port for which you want to display the MVRP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the MVRP statistics information Figure 3 17 2 The MVRP Port Statistics I Refresh Clear Port Join Tx Count Leave Tx Count uk 2000000000000 2000000000000 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 12 Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can see port counters and statistics Join Tx Count explain Join tx Count here Leave Tx Count explain Leave Tx Count here Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear Click on these icons to refresh the MVRP Port Statistics information or clear manually 130 LGB5124A User Manual 3 16 QoS The switch supports four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advanced programmable QoS classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges Classifying incoming frames to a QoS class is ve
287. ther similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media e Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined eo TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format e VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is signif
288. this box and click on Save to delete the clock instance e Clock Instance Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance 0 3 Click on the Clock Instance number to edit the Clock details e Device Type Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types 1 0rd Bound clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock 2 P2p Transp clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock 3 E2e Transp clock s Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock 4 MastrOnly clock s Device Type is Master Only 5 SlaveOnly clock s Device Type is Slave Only e Port List Set a check mark for each port configured for this Clock Instance e 2 Step Flag Static member defined by the system true if two step Sync events and Pdelay_Resp events are used e Clock Identity Shows a unique clock identifier One Way If true one way measurements are used This parameter applies only to a slave In one way mode no delay measurements are performed i e this is applicable only if frequency synchronization is needed The master always responds to delay requests o Protocol Transport protocol used by the PTP protocol engine You can scroll to select the following protocols ethernet PTP over Ethernet multicast ip4multi PTP over IPv4 multicast ip4uni PTP over IPv4 unicast 176 LGB5124A User Manual Gi Note IPv4 unicast protocol only works in Master only and Slave only clocks See parameter Device Type In
289. tic NAS Combined 3 Display MAC based information Figure 3 10 6 2 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Stic v Auto etiesh Port Members MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 No data exists for the user Parameter description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry e Auto refresh Check the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this button to refresh the MAC based VLAN Membership information manually 115 3 10 7 Protocol based VLAN This section describes Protocol based VLAN Protocols supported by the switch include Ethernet LLC and SNAP LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to coexist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ error management mechanisms SNAP The Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC
290. tical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For troubleshooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying
291. ticast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 6 4 Status The section describes how to display the MLD Snooping Status and detail information Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Status in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Status 2 To auto refresh the information click on the Auto refresh button 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Status 80 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 6 4 The MLD Snooping Status VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries V1 Reports V2Reports V1Leaves ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received 1 v2 v2 ACTIVE 0 0 0 0 0 my 1 2 3 4 E 6 7 8 9A 0A 9B o um Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version The currently working Querier Version e Host Version The currently working Host Version e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries e Queries Received The number of Received Queries e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V1 Leaves Received The number of Received V1 Leaves e Auto refresh Check th
292. tion manually 3 6 IGMP Snooping The function is used to establish the multicast groups to forward multicast packets to the member ports and avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping cannot distinguish multicast packets from broadcast packets so it can only treat them all as broadcast packets Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet forwarding IGMP Snooping includes query report and leave functions A type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the information of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who previously joined in a specified IP multicast group The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP 3 6 1 Basic Configuration The section describes how to set the basic IGMP sn
293. tistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch 88 LGB5124A User Manual D Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets when the hold time is exceeded o Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted eo Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted e Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP informati
294. to refresh To refresh the log automatically check the auto refresh box e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click the Refresh icon to them refresh the IGMP Group Status manually Click the other icons for next up page or entry 74 LGB5124A User Manual 3 5 6 IPv4 SSM information Source Specific Multicast SSM is a datagram delivery model that best supports one to many applications also known as broadcast applications SSM is a core network technology of IP multicast targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments For the SSM delivery mode an IP multicast receiver host must use IGMP Version 3 IGMPv3 to subscribe to channel S G By subscribing to this channel the receiver host is indicating that it wants to receive IP multicast traffic sent by source host S to group G The network will deliver IP multicast packets from source host S to group G to all hosts in the network that have subscribed to the channel S G SSM does not require group address allocation within the network only within each source host Different applications running on the same source host must use different SSM groups Different applications running on different source hosts can arbitrarily reuse SSM group addresses without causing any excess traffic on the network Addresses in the range 232 0 0 0 8 232 0 0 0 to 232 255 255 255 are reserved for SSM by IANA In the switch you can configure SSM for arbitrary IP multicast ad
295. to server e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients e Receive from Server The number of packets received from server Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing e Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics e Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers e Receive from Client The number of received packets from server e Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option 192 LGB5124A User Manual The number of packets that were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper
296. tomatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this icon to refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information manually 3 12 GARP The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic framework that devices in a bridged LAN e g end stations and switches can register and de register attribute values such as VLAN Identifiers with each other In doing so the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN and these devices form a j reachabilityj tree that is a subset of an active topology GARP defines the architecture rules of operation state machines and variables for the registration and de registration of attribute values A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component and a GARP Information Declaration GID component associated with each port or the switch The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation GIP component Protocol exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services using the group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned 3 12 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GARP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GARP Port Configuration in the Web int
297. tor Specify the Authentication Method none local radius tacacs Check Fallback Click Save RON Figure 4 11 1 The HTTPS Configuration Authentication Method Configuration Client Authentication Method Fallback console local v telnet local v ssh local y web local Parameter description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values e none authentication is disabled and login is not possible e local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication e radius use aremote RADIUS server for authentication e tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 222 LGB5124A User Manual Maintenance This chapter describes switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of the local network including Restart Device Firmware upgrade Save Restore Import Export and Diagnostics 5 1 Restart Device This section describes how
298. tries Parameter description MVR Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh Check the auto refresh box to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt Click to refresh the MVR Group information manually or to go to next up page or entry 85 3 7 3 Statistics The section describes how the switch will display the MVR detail Statistics after you configured MVR on the switch It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information Web Interface To display the MVR Statistics Information in the Web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Statistics 2 To auto refresh the information check the Auto refresh box 3 Click the Refresh button to refresh a entry of the MVR Statistics Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 3 The MVR Statistics Information MVR Statistics Autorefresh Vi Reports V2Reports V3Reports V2 Leaves hereto Received Received Received Received 100 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e VLANID The Multicast VLAN ID e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh Check the auto refr
299. tting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 9 The DSCP Classification Configuration DSCP Classification QoS Class DPL DSCP 0 0 0 BE y 0 1 0 BE 1 0 0 BE y 1 1 0 BE 2 0 0 BE 2 1 0 BE y 3 0 0 BE w 3 1 0 BE v 4 0 0 BE v 4 1 0 BE 5 0 0 BE y 5 1 0 BE 6 0 0 BE v 6 1 0 BE 7 0 0 BE v 7 1 0 BE Reset Parameter description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to parameters eo DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value eo Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 145 3 16 10 QoS Control List Configuration The section shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Web Interface To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the Web interface Click Configuration QoS QoS Contol List 1 Click Configuration QoS QoS Contol List 2 Click the button to add a new QoS Control List 3 Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules 4 Click the save button to
300. u sure you want to activate the alternate software image Parameter description e Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state e Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page eo Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk e Version The version of the firmware image e Date The date where the firmware was produced 225 NOTE 1 In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 226 LGB5124A User Manual 5 3 Save Restore This section describes how to save and restore the Switch configuration including reset to Factory Defaults Save Start Save Users or Restore Users for any maintenance needs 5 3 1 Factory Defaults This section describes how to reset the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Web I
301. ubstantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host L LACP LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLC The IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC protocol provides a link mechanism for upper layer protocols It is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms for several network protocols IP IPX to coexist within a multipoint network LLC header consists of 1 byte DSAP Destination Service Access Point 1 byte SSAP Source Service Access Point 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information LLDP LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the
302. ue of parameters in blank field in Basic Settings 3 Enable or disable the parameters and write down available values of parameters in the blank field in Advanced settings 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 52 LGB5124A User Manual Figure 3 4 1 The STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version MSTP ov Bridge Priority Forward Delay Max Age w Maximum Hop Count po Transmit Hold Count 6 Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering O Edge Port BPDU Guard z Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout Parameter description Basic Settings e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transmit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range
303. um number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meantime without affecting the RADIUS assignea This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in 198 LGB5124A User Manual order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be iden
304. umber of detected errored frames in the period Total Frame Errors This eight octet field indicates the sum of errored frames that have been detected since the OAM sub layer was reset 164 LGB5124A User Manual Total Frame Error Events This four octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sub layer was reset Frame Period Error Event Timestamp This two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in 100 ms intervals Frame Period Error Event Window This field shows this four octet field indicates the duration of period of frames Frame Period Error Event Threshold This four octet field indicates the number of errored frames in the period required to be equal to or greater than for the event to be generated Frame Period Errors The field shows this four octet field indicates the number of frame errors in the period Total Frame Period Errors This eight octet field indicates the sum of frame errors that have been detected since the OAM sub layer was reset Total Frame Period Error Events This four octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Period Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sub layer was reset Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp This two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in 100 ms intervals Symbol Period Error Event Window This eight octet field indica
305. up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address that shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 3 9 1 Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here Web Interface To configure the MAC Address Table in the Web interface Aging Configuration 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time 3 Click Save MAC Table Learning 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Port Members Auto Disable Secure 3 Click Save Static MAC Table Configuration 1 Click configuration and Add new Static entry 2 Specify the VLAN IP and Mac address Port Members 3 Click Save Figure 3 9 1 The MAC Address Table Configuration MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic A
306. uration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DPO and Remap DP1 Parameters 3 Enable or disable Classify 4 Click on the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 8 The DSCP Translation Configuration Ingress Egress uid Translate Classify Remap DPO Remap DP1 lc e elle E 0 BE os O owe milo 1 1 H a 1 VE o 2 2 e O 2 EEIE e 3 3 y oO 3 MIE Y 4 4 K O 4 e 4 Y 5 5 E E als x 6 6 m E OE E 7 7 E w E HIE x aes sa cst mO ls cst miie cst m foo Ae de 40 AF11 10 AF11 O 10 AF 11 e 10 AF11 w 1 11 SAA 11 mp1 x 12 AF12 12 AF12 v O iara e 12 F12 e 13 13 v O 13 EVE na 14 AF13 14 AF13 w Ol 14 aF13 e 14 AF 13 v 16 15 E m ss 18 x 46 CS2 16 cs3 O 16 cs2 16 cs2 17 m SiM E 49 ls ao 49 x 50 50 O 50 51 O si 52 52 Y a 52 x 53 53 H a 53 E 54 54 H a 4 55 55 E m 55 a 56 CS7 56 CS7 y O 56 s7 x 57 s ANO s7 l 58 58 x O ss 59 59 Ol m 59 x 60 60 AO 60 x 61 O a jr Mi o 62 x O 63 x Parameter description e DSCP The maximum numbe
307. uration sFlow Agent sampler 2 Click the circle E buton to edit the sFlow sampler parameters 3 Scroll to Sample Type to choice with None Tx Rx or All 4 Click the save button to save the setting 5 To cancel the setting click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 2 The sFlow sampler Configuration sh O Rees sFlow Ports sFlow Instance Sampler Type Sampling Rate Max Hdr Size Counter Polling Interval 1 1 None 0 128 0 2 1 None 0 128 0 OY 3 1 None 0 128 0 4 1 None 0 128 0 5 1 None 0 128 0 6 1 None 0 128 0 7 1 None 0 128 0 8 1 None 0 128 0 e 9A 1 None 0 128 0 104 1 None 0 128 0 e 9B 1 None 0 128 0 10B 1 None 0 128 o sFlow Instance Sampler Type Save Reset I Cancel Parameter description e sFlow Ports List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured e sFlow Instance Configured sFlow instance for the port number e Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types None Rx Tx or All You can scroll to choose one for your sampler type By default The value is None e Sampling Rate Configured sampling rate on the ports 153 e Max Hdr Size Configured size of the header of the sampled frame e Polling Interval Configured polling interval for the counter sampling e Buttons Circle E button Edits the Data source sampler configuration Save Click to save changes Reset Cl
308. ut a few groups contain more than one The following defines these privilege level groups in detail System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY 12 LGB5124A User Manual Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g to clear statistics The User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have access to that group 2 4 IP IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an Internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is
309. val 30 seconds Tx Hold 3 times TxDelay 2 seconds Tx Reinit 2 seconds Optional TLVs Port Mode CDP aware PortDescr SysName SysDescr Sys Capa Mgmt Addr 1 Disabled v O Y Y Y M Y 2 Disabled O y M Y Y Y 3 Disabled v O M M Y Y Y 4 Disabled v O Y Y Y vy 5 Disabled O Y Y Y Y Iv 6 Disabled v O y Y y Y Y 7 Disabled Y O Y Y Y M v 8 Disabled v O Y M v M v 9A Disabled O Y Y Y Y lv 10A Disabled v O y Y Y Y Y 9B Disabled v O Y Y v Y v 10B Disabled v O Y Y Y Y v Parameter description LLDP Parameters Oo Tx Interval The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds 87 o Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame will be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid valu
310. ve Parameters description e Delete Check lt Delete gt entry then click on the lt Save gt button and the entry will be deleted Trap Version You may choose vi v2c or v3 trap eo Server IP Assign the SNMP Host IP address e UDP Port Assign the Port number Default 162 e Community Security Name The length of Community Security Name string is restricted to 1 32 e Security Level Indicates what kind of message will be sent to Security Level Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors e Security Level There are three kinds of choices NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Authentication Protocol You can choose MD5 or SHA for authentication e Authentication Password The length of MD5 Authentication Password is restricted to 8 32 The length of SHA Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 27 Privacy Protocol You can set DES encryption for UserName e Privacy Password The length of Privacy Password is restricted to 8 32 28 LGB5124A User Manual Configuration This chapter describes all of the basic network configuration tasks including the Ports Layer 2 network protocol e g VLANs QoS IGMP ACLs and PoE etc and any setting of the switch 3 1 Port The section describes how to configur
311. ver Address 2 Syslog Level Info v Reset Parameter description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will be sent out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and is received on UDP port 514 The syslog server will not send acknowledgments back to the sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode operation e Server Address 1 and 2 Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server 1 and server 2 for redundancy If the switch provides a DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will be sent to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors 16 LGB5124A User Manual 2 5 2 Log This section how to display the system log information of the switch Web Interface To display the log configuration in the Web interface 1 Click Syslog Log 2 Display the log information Figure 2 5 2 The System Log configuration Level Switch just made a cold boot ID al 2 3 4 5 T 8 9 10 1970 01 01 00 00 05 1970 01 01 00 26 08 1970 01 01 00 55 53 1970 01 01 01 47 14 1970 01 01 01 48 36
312. witch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 1 1000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 100 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted 135 e Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 1 Port Shaper Rate 1000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 100 when the Unit is Mbps e Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps O Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
313. x Count explain Join tx Count here Leave Tx Count explain Leave Tx Count here Auto refresh Click the box next to auto refresh and the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Click on this button to refresh the GVRP Port Statistics information manually 124 LGB5124A User Manual 3 14 MRP This standard specifies protocols procedures and managed objects to support the Multiple Registration Protocol MRP MRP allows participants in a MRP Application to register attributes with other participants in a Bridged Local Area Network The definition of attribute types their values and the semantics associated with values when registered are specific to each MRP application Two Applications are defined to register VLANs MVRP and Group MAC addresses MMRP 3 14 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic MRP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure MRP Port Configuration in the Web interface 1 Click MRP configure 2 Specify MRP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 14 1 The MRP Port Configuration MRP Port Configuration Auto refresh O Timer Values F z E Port Jon Tiner Leave mer Leave Al Timer Applicantion Attribute Type MRP Applicant Periodic Tx 1 200 600 10000 MVRP VLAN vw normal participant Disable 2 200
314. y This chapter describes all of the switch security configuration tasks that enhance the security of local networks including IP Source Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping AAA etc 4 1 IP Source Guard The section describes how to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch Use the IP Source Guard to enable or disable a switch port 4 1 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure an IP Source Guard setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited Web Interface To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the Web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Select Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited of the specific port in the Port Mode Configuration 4 Click Save Figure 4 1 1 The IP Source Guard Configuration 180 LGB5124A User Manual Parameter description Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled Port Mode Configuration Specify which ports IP Source Guard is enabled on Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients th

LGB5124A User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents